Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / Rathbones Group / FY2011 Annual Report

Rathbones Group
Annual Report 2011

RAT · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker RAT
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2011 Annual Report · Rathbones Group
Loading PDF…
Rathbone Brothers Plc 
Report and accounts 2011

2011 Review

Rathbone Brothers Plc 

Rathbone Brothers Plc is a 
leading provider of high-quality, 
personalised investment and 
wealth management services 
for private clients, charities and 
trustees. This includes discretionary 
investment management, unit 
trusts, tax planning, trust and 
company management, pension 
advice and banking services.

As at 31 December 2011, 
Rathbones managed £15.85 billion 
of client funds of which  
£14.76 billion are managed  
by Rathbone Investment 
Management.

1	
2	
3	
4	

7	
8	
10	
12	
17	
23	

28	

Highlights	of	the	year
The	case	for	investors
Chairman’s	statement
Chief	Executive’s	statement

Our business
Our	business	model	
Rathbones	at	a	glance
Strategy	and	business	performance
Business	review
Financial	review
Risk	management	report

Our responsibility
Corporate	responsibility	report

Governance

38	
41	
45	
49	
59	
61	
62	

Directors
Directors’	report
Corporate	governance	report
Remuneration	report
Audit	Committee	report
Nomination	Committee	report
Statement	of	directors’	responsibilities	in	respect	of	the	
report	and	accounts

Consolidated financial statements

64	

66	
67	
68	
69	
70	

Independent	auditor’s	report	to	the	members	of		
Rathbone	Brothers	Plc
Consolidated	statement	of	comprehensive	income
Consolidated	statement	of	changes	in	equity
Consolidated	balance	sheet
Consolidated	statement	of	cash	flows
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements

Company financial statements

116	 Company	statement	of	comprehensive	income	
116	 Company	statement	of	changes	in	equity
117	 Company	balance	sheet
118	 Company	statement	of	cash	flows
119	 Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements
134	
Five	year	record
135	 Corporate	information
136	 Our	offices

Report and accounts online 

We	aim	to	provide	easy	and	transparent	access	to		
shareholder	information.	As	well	as	the	printed	annual	report		
and	accounts,	we	have	developed	an	online	version	which	
presents	a	flexible	way	of	accessing	the	information	you	need.		
We	hope	you	find	it	a	valuable	addition	to	our	suite	of	reporting	
materials	and	would	value	any	feedback	you	may	have	via	the		
link	provided	on	the	site.

www.rathbones.com/ra2011

 
 
Highlights of the year

Financial highlights

Operational highlights

Funds under management 

2011: £15.85bn 
2010: £15.63bn

Operating income

2011: £144.5m 
2010: £127.2m

Underlying1 profit before tax

2011: £46.2m 
2010: £38.5m

Profit before tax 

2011: £39.2m 
2010: £30.1m

+1.4%

+13.6%

+20.0%

+30.2%

Underlying1 earnings per share

2011: 78.79p 
2010: 63.76p

Basic earnings per share

+23.6%

2011: 66.72p 
2010: 49.76p

+34.1%

Dividends paid and proposed per share

2011: 46.0p 
2010: 44.0p

+4.5%

1  Underlying profit before tax and underlying earnings per share exclude
  exceptional Financial Services Compensation Scheme levies, amortisation  
of client relationships, head office relocation costs and gains on disposal  
of financial securities

Rathbones named ‘Discretionary 
Company of the Year’ at the  
Investment Week Fund Manager  
of the Year Awards. 

See page 12

Mark Nicholls succeeds Mark Powell 
as chairman.

Paul Chavasse appointed as 
head of investment management,  
succeeding Richard Lanyon. 

See page 5

Andrew Butcher’s appointment as 
chief operating officer announced. 

See page 5

Rathbones’ second Annual Charity 
Symposium hosted by the charity 
team is held at the Merchant  
Taylors’ Hall.  

See page 13

Rathbone Unit Trust Management 
launches two new funds –  
the Rathbone Enhanced Growth  
Portfolio and the Rathbone  
Strategic Bond Fund. 

See page 15

Rathbones migrates its  
London-based internal servers 
to a centralised data centre. 

See page 30

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The case for investors

Rathbones is well placed in a growing wealth market as a stable  
business with the right skills and qualities to take advantage of future 
growth opportunities.

Market

•  Positive demographics in a growing and ageing population.

•  Reducing government and employer provision for pension savings drives an increasing need for individual planning.

•  Economic need for the UK savings ratio to improve.

The case for investing in Rathbones

Our business

Skills and qualities

Future opportunities

•  A consistent record of growth both 
organically and through acquisition.

•  Cash generation with an ungeared 

balance sheet.

•  An investment process which 

harnesses the expertise and insight  
of our investment managers on 
asset allocation and stock selection.

•  Low employee turnover.

•  Balanced remuneration structures 

rewarding both profits and  
funds growth.

•  Stable dividend progression.

•  Open and transparent 

communication to the market.

•  Timely recognition of changes to 
the regulatory environment.

•  High professional standards for 
investment managers and  
financial advisors.

•  Quality and cost efficiency of 
operations in Liverpool.

•  Sustained investment in  

people, investment process and 
technology, improving client  
service and providing support to 
investment managers.

•  Our brand values and client service 
culture provide a stable platform  
for future organic growth.

•  An attractive place for new 

investment managers and/or teams.

•  Well positioned for the Retail 

Distribution Review.

•  Opportunities for acquisitions that  

fit our culture.

2 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

Chairman’s statement

Mark Nicholls
Chairman

I became chairman in May 2011 and feel privileged to be  
the first chairman to be appointed from outside the firm.  
I would like to thank my predecessor Mark Powell, who has 
made the transition very easy for me. In this brief statement  
I shall outline my areas of focus as a new chairman in the 
context of Rathbones as I see it today. 

I have a background in financial services but not in private 
client investment management. I have, therefore, spent a 
considerable amount of time learning about the business.  
I have found Rathbones to be a robust business which depends 
on a number of factors: the high quality of our investment 
managers; the strong relationship between those investment 
managers and their clients; the value of our central investment 
process and systems; and finally our collegiate culture and 
embedded compliance practices. All of these factors together 
represent a solid platform which has enabled us to build  
an enviable reputation. It is this we strive to preserve.

Strategy review

Last October we held our annual strategy meeting involving 
the Board and senior management where we focused our 
discussion on three areas: growing our core investment 
management business; developing our tax, trust and family 
office business; and partnering with the IFA community. The 
analysis and discussion at the meeting will help us develop our 
plans further and enhance the value of what we have built  
up over time.

Risk

We have had several detailed discussions on risk at the 
Board. We regard the greatest risks to Rathbones as threats 
to our reputation, regulatory intervention in our sector and 
the counterparty risk inherent in being a bank. We have 
added two non-executive directors to our risk management  
committee (which also consists of the heads of all our major 
departments) and have recently taken the decision to appoint 
a non-executive director as chairman. I am delighted that 
Kathryn Matthews has agreed to take on this important role 
from 1 March 2012. Her wide experience of the investment 
management industry will be of great benefit to us.

Governance, Board and senior management

As chairman, I have to ensure that we have the best  
possible Board to give leadership to the business and 
that, through our non-executive directors, we can provide 
appropriate challenge to management. My main priorities here 
have been to streamline the working of the Board and to prepare 
for the departure from an executive role of Richard Lanyon,  
our long-standing and highly regarded head of investment 
management. I have been working closely with Andy Pomfret 
and my other Board colleagues on all these areas. The first 
decision we made was to appoint Paul Chavasse as successor 
to Richard Lanyon, which was announced on 1 July 2011. Our 
decision came after a rigorous review of our management 
within the Group. This review has, in turn, laid the foundations 
for a more structured development programme for our senior 
management, which is essential for good succession planning.

As a business in the financial sector in 2012 we must maintain 
high standards of governance. The Board has recently 
undertaken an evaluation of its own performance, of its 
committees and individual directors. Although the evaluation 
was generally positive, a number of improvements have been 
suggested and these will be implemented. I am delighted to say 
the discussions we have had as part of this important process 
have been refreshingly open and constructive.

Our performance evaluation also concluded that we had 
an appropriate balance of skills on the Board. The Board 
continues to believe that, whilst the best qualified candidate 
should be appointed to any role, a range of backgrounds,  
skills and experience is desirable. Gender diversity plays  
an important part in this.

In accordance with best practice, all directors will be seeking 
re-election at the AGM.

Shareholder engagement

We have a tradition at Rathbones of close engagement  
with our investors and, although this is largely carried out  
by Andy Pomfret and Paul Stockton, I have been delighted  
to meet some of our largest shareholders to discuss our 
mutual aspirations. I look forward to a continuing dialogue 
with shareholders on the many issues that arise out of the  
challenges and opportunities we face.

As you will see from Andy Pomfret’s report, we produced  
a solid performance in 2011 in difficult circumstances.  
I hope you will find this year’s annual report provides a clear  
account of how we run our business and what we have 
achieved during the year.

Mark Nicholls 
Chairman

20 February 2012

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

3

 
 
 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s statement

Andy Pomfret
Chief Executive

Results and financial highlights

In spite of often difficult market conditions, our profit  
before tax for the year to 31 December 2011 was up 30.2% 
to £39.2 million compared to £30.1 million in 2010, and 
basic earnings per share of 66.72p were up 34.1% on 49.76p  
in 2010. These results include some £3.0 million of costs  
incurred in respect of the planned relocation of our London 
head office in 2012. We thankfully did not see a repeat  
of last year’s £3.6 million exceptional Financial Services 
Compensation Scheme levy largely caused by the failure  
of Keydata Investment Services.

Underlying profit before tax (which excludes client  
relationship amortisation charges and exceptional income 
and expense items as defined on page 17) was £46.2 million, 
up 20.0% compared to £38.5 million in 2010. Underlying 
earnings per share were 78.79p, up 23.6% on the 63.76p 
earned in 2010. We increased the number of Rathbone 
Investment Management clients to 38,380 at 31 December 
2011 from 37,400 one year ago, attracting net new funds  
of £1.10 billion in the year (2010: £1.24 billion).

Notwithstanding current economic uncertainties, the  
Board is recommending a final dividend of 29.0p per share, 
making a total dividend per share of 46.0p for the year; up 
4.5% from the 44.0p in 2010. The final dividend will be paid 
on 17 May 2012. In this economic climate it is important  
to report that our balance sheet at 31 December 2011  
is now ungeared as external borrowings of £3.1 million  
at 31 December 2010 were repaid in the year. Our Group  
Tier 1 capital ratio was 26.9% at 31 December 2011  
(2010: 28.3%) on a Basel III basis, which gives an  
indication of the strength of our capital base.

Financial markets

Investment markets

2011 was a difficult year overall although it divided into  
two distinct halves. In the first half, markets rose as investors 
concluded that there would not be a double-dip recession and 
that the problems in the eurozone could be resolved. Our first 
half was therefore positive as markets presented investment 
managers with some good opportunities for clients and this 
was evident in first half commission levels of £20.0 million 
(2010: £18.7 million). Sentiment changed in the second half 
though as the eurozone crisis led to questions about whether 
Greece would default, which in turn increased speculation on 
the future of the Euro and the position of other indebted 
countries such as Italy and Spain. This sentiment  
change unsettled markets and reduced trading volumes  
across the industry.

We expect that asset allocation will continue to be  
difficult in 2012 as global markets rebalance and, in many 
developed economies, we see a weak banking sector,  
inflation uncertainties and continued low interest rates, 
compounding fears of recession.

Loans and money markets

As Rathbones has a banking licence, the vast majority  
of cash in client portfolios is held with us as a deposit.  
We invest this cash in the money markets and therefore  
have exposure to a number of banks around Europe  
as part of a well diversified treasury portfolio. In light of  
developments in the eurozone, the banking committee 
responded by reallocating monies held with Spanish and  
Italian banks to UK treasury bills. These UK Government 
securities represented 9.6% (2010: 0%) of the total  
treasury assets of £0.91 billion at 31 December 2011.  
At 31 December 2011, all (2010: all) treasury assets were  
rated Fitch single A or above. Outstanding loans to  
clients were £47.8 million at 31 December 2011  
(2010: £40.0 million) and continue to be an important  
part of our relationship with clients.

Our approach

For many years our strategy has been to ‘be a leading 
provider of high-quality, personalised investment and wealth 
management services...’ and in these difficult times our 
consistency has served us well. We believe that this stability  
is precisely what clients are looking for in difficult times and 
this, combined with our independent ownership, has led  
to high client retention as well as being one of the reasons 
why many investment managers have chosen to join us with 
their clients over the last decade.

4 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s statement continued

Our approach continued

Key to the success of the firm is the quality of our staff,  
and we now employ over 750 people in 12 locations.  
Although the current economic climate means that it has  
been difficult to increase levels of pay, profit share and  
reward to match inflation, we continue to look at additional 
ways of incentivising staff. For many years we have  
had in place a Share Incentive Plan and more recently  
introduced a Save As You Earn scheme, both of which  
are government-approved ways of encouraging employee 
share ownership. Over 90% of employees participate in  
one or both of these schemes.

A new head office

In 2011, considerable time was invested in finding, 
negotiating, and then fitting-out our new head office in 
London at 1 Curzon Street. We will be moving all London 
staff currently located in 159 and 161 New Bond Street into 
these premises in February 2012. This new space (about one 
and a third floors of a six storey building) will enable us to 
put the majority of our staff onto a single open plan floor 
with the other floor used for internal and external meeting 
rooms. It will be a significant improvement to get everybody 
in London into one location and I am sure all will benefit 
from working in a more open environment which will 
promote greater internal communication. The location of  
the new office will also mean there is little change for either 
staff or clients as Curzon Street is only some 400 yards  
from our existing offices.

Regulation

Suitability

During the year there has been a great deal of attention  
placed by the FSA on the industry’s approach to ensuring  
that investment portfolios are suitable for clients. Although 
the FSA’s 2011 thematic review reported serious concerns 
around whether portfolios were suitable for clients  
among many of our peer group, we are not – and have  
not been – subject to any regulatory action in this regard.  
We continue to believe that our approach to managing 
suitability is appropriate.

The Prudential Regulatory Authority (PRA) and the 
Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)

During 2012 the FSA will be moving to parallel running  
the new ‘twin peaks’ regulatory structure which is expected 
to come into effect in 2013 following the passing of the 
relevant legislation. As Rathbones holds a banking licence, 
we will be regulated by both the PRA and the FCA. The  
PRA will be the lead regulator for all banks in the UK and  
in many ways we see it as acting in a similar way to how  
the Bank of England has done in the past. Our conduct  
of business will be regulated and supervised by the FCA.  

It will be interesting to see how these two bodies interact  
and we believe that ensuring that these organisations  
work well together is in our interests and the interests  
of the financial services industry as a whole. We are doing  
all we can to continue to develop and improve our  
regulatory relationships.

There has been much discussion in the press around  
resolution planning for banks (living wills) and, given our 
banking licence, we will be developing plans accordingly.  
We are supportive of this regulation and consider it a good 
opportunity to test and improve our current procedures

Board and management changes

It was with great sadness that we said goodbye to  
Mark Powell at the AGM in 2011. Mark was very much  
part of Rathbones for more than twenty years and we 
thanked him at the AGM for his outstanding contribution, 
both to the Company and to our industry. At the AGM  
we were pleased to welcome Mark Nicholls as our new 
non-executive chairman. Mark had been on the Board  
since December 2010, when he was appointed with the 
intention of succeeding Mark Powell.

We announced at the half year that Richard Lanyon  
would be standing down from the Board and his managerial 
responsibilities as head of investment management during  
2012 and that he would be succeeded by Paul Chavasse.  
Paul will take up this role at the beginning of March 2012 
when we have completed our London head office move  
to 1 Curzon Street.

In December 2011 we announced the appointment  
of Andrew Butcher as our new chief operating officer,  
who will join us in March 2012 from Charles Stanley.  
We very much look forward to working with him.

Outlook

Rathbones is cautiously optimistic about the prospects for 
2012 with the UK equity market ending 2011 on a more 
positive note. There is no doubt that the uncertainties over 
Europe persist but these are balanced by indications that  
the world economy continues to grow and some developed 
economies are showing small signs of improvement, 
particularly the USA. We are seeing signs of underlying cost 
inflation but we will continue to invest in and grow our 
business. We continue to be well positioned to take 
advantage of opportunities to welcome more investment 
managers and clients to Rathbones.

Andy Pomfret
Chief Executive

20 February 2012

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

5

 
Our business

7	
8	
10	
12	
17	
23	

Our	business	model	
Rathbones	at	a	glance
Strategy	and	business	performance
Business	review
Financial	review
Risk	management	report

6 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report	and	accounts	2011

Our business model

Rathbone Brothers Plc is a leading provider of high-quality, 
personalised investment and wealth management services for private 
clients, charities and trustees. This includes discretionary investment 
management, unit trusts, tax planning, trust and company management, 
pension advice and banking services, employing over 750 people in  
11 UK locations and in Jersey.

Investment Management

Market

Services

Growth

We provide investment 
services to:

•  private clients;

•  professional  

intermediaries;

Our discretionary investment management service accounts 
for nearly all of our business. This service is underpinned  
by robust systems and a strong investment process which 
provides guidance to our investment managers. It is  
defined by four key features:

Referrals from existing 
clients, professional 
intermediaries and charities 
are the best source of  
new business.

We attract investment 
managers as suitable 
opportunities arise.

We engage in targeted 
marketing and business 
development activity 
focusing on intermediaries 
and charities.

•   a direct relationship with an investment manager rather 

•  charities; and

than relying on relationship managers;

• 

trustees.

•   bespoke investment portfolios that meet individual client 

We have an offshore 
presence in Jersey.

requirements rather than model portfolios;

•   investments selected from all global markets; and

•   transparent fee arrangements.

Our service is complemented by our ability to offer:

•  financial planning advice;

• 

• 

tax and trust advice;

loans to clients and payment services;

•  ethical investment services through Rathbone 

Greenbank Investments; and

•   advisory and execution only services.

Unit Trusts

Market

Services

Growth

Our unit trusts are 
purchased by:

•  professional 

intermediaries;

Our range of actively managed specialist and multi asset 
unit trusts are designed to meet core investment needs. 
Our approach is underpinned by a strong investment 
philosophy and process.

•   institutional investors; and

•   private clients.

Our unit trusts are managed by established and 
experienced investment managers who provide a strong 
breadth and depth of expertise.

The majority of our 
growth is achieved 
through professional 
intermediaries and 
institutions.

Our funds are available 
across all the UK’s 
major wrap and fund 
supermarket platforms.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

7

 
 
 
 
Rathbones at a glance

Our market

Rathbones in context

•  £402bn of FUM managed  
in the UK by private client  
wealth managers1

•  We manage £15.85bn,  

which equates approximately  
to a 4% market share

•  The UK market comprises circa  
1.6m individuals with liquid  
assets >£100,000

•  We provide investment  

management services to over 
38,000 clients

•  Of an estimated 541,000 high  

net worth individuals with liquid  
assets >£500,0002 approximately
300,000 employ an investment 
manager3

•  Over 150 companies offer wealth 
management services in the UK

1  The City UK, Fund Management 2010 report
2  MDRC, UK high net worth 2011 report
3  Canaccord Adams Wealth Management report, January 2009

•  Our investment management  
client portfolios range in size  
from £100,000 to over £100m

•  Almost 50% of the money we 

manage is in client relationships  
of greater than £1m

Total Rathbones

Funds under management (FUM)

Investment Management 
Unit Trusts 

Underlying operating income

Investment Management 
Unit Trusts 

Key measures 

Market capitalisation at 31 December (£m) 
Total assets (£m) 
Total equity (£m) 
Basel III Tier 1 ratio (%) 
Profit before tax (£m) 

Funds under management £bn

  2011: 15.85

  2010: 15.63

  2009: 13.10

  2008: 10.46

  2007: 13.12

Annual total shareholder return %

2011: 0.9

2010: 43.8

2009: 0.8

2008: (17.3)

2007: (9.8)

2011 
£bn 

14.76 
1.09 

15.85 

2011 
£m 

135.1 
8.2 

143.3 

2010
£bn

14.59
1.04

15.63

2010
£m

119.8
7.4

127.2

2011 

2010

461.7 
1,183.8 
190.7 
26.9 
39.2 

474.5
1,028.1
185.4
28.3
30.1

8 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Rathbones at a glance continued

Investment Management

Account size by value

Investment management teams provide mainly discretionary 
investment management services to private investors and 
charities with portfolios held in discretionary accounts, trust 
structures, ISA accounts or self-invested personal pensions 
(SIPPs) from offices in the UK and Jersey. The service we 
offer is bespoke with a well-researched process servicing 
individual client needs.

Our fees and charges are transparent, and alongside our 
investment management services we offer a number of  
banking services including currency, fixed interest term  
deposits and loans secured against portfolios.

Our charities team advises over 500 charities, with funds  
under management worth £1.68 billion. In 2011 we held our 
second Charity Symposium with 248 charities in attendance.

Our ethical service continues to grow, building up extensive 
expertise in understanding how financial and ethical issues  
can be integrated within portfolios to meet the overall 
objectives of clients.

Rathbone Pension & Advisory Services advises clients on 
retirement planning options and offers the Rathbone SIPP. 

Rathbone Trust Company provides taxation, probate,  
trust and family office services. 

Principal trading names

•  Rathbone Investment Management 
•  Rathbone Investment Management International 
•  Rathbone Pension & Advisory Services 
•  Rathbone Trust Company

Direct employees (average full time equivalents)

•  533 

Offices

•  Aberdeen 
•  Birmingham 
•  Bristol 

•  Cambridge 
•  Chichester 
•  Edinburgh 

•  Exeter 
•  Jersey 
•  Kendal 

•  Liverpool 
•  London 
•  Winchester

Head of Investment Management

•  Richard Lanyon (Paul Chavasse with effect from 1 March 2012)

Websites

•  General – www.rathbones.com  
•  Ethical investment – www.rathbonegreenbank.com

Funds under management

As at December 2011 

  Discretionary 
  Non-discretionary 

Account type by funds under management

As at December 2011 

  Private client 
  Trust and settlements 

ISAs 
  Charities 
  Pensions including SIPPs 
  Other 

%

94.5
5.5

%

46.0
14.6
13.5
11.2
11.3
3.4

As at December 2011 

  Over £1 million 
  £500,000 – £1 million 
  £250,000 – £499,999 
  £100,000 – £249,999 
  £50,000 – £99,999 
  Up to £50,000 

%

48.8
18.6
17.0
12.1
2.7
0.8

Number of Investment Management clients ’000

  2011: 38.4

  2010: 37.4

  2009: 31.2

  2008: 30.3

  2007: 29.2

Top ten UK private client wealth managers (ranked by discretionary 
assets under management as at 31 December 2010)

Company 

Coutts & Co 
HSBC1 
GLG Partners 
Rathbones 
Lloyds TSB Private Banking 
Investec Wealth & Investment 
Hargreaves Lansdown Asset Management 
Goldman Sachs International 
Cazenove Capital Management  
Smith & Williamson Investment Management 

Discretionary AUM2 
(£m) 

Total AUM
(£m)

36,933 
19,255 
14,400 
13,788 
10,000 
9,720 
8,920 
8,634 
7,900 
7,559 

43,450 
32,636
14,400 
14,590 
10,000
12,790
22,3003
23,7004
7,900 
10,079

Source: Private Asset Managers directory, 2011
1  Combined data for HSBC Global Asset Managers and HSBC Private Bank
2  Barclays Wealth, St James’s Place Wealth Management and Brewin Dolphin 

(total assets under management: £51.43bn, £27.00bn and £25.00bn  
respectively) do not provide a breakdown of their discretionary assets  
under management

3  Includes assets under administration
4  Private Asset Managers directory estimate

Unit Trusts

We offer a range of unit trusts and OEICs which are 
distributed mainly through independent financial advisers  
in the UK. 

Funds cover the UK stock market, embracing small,  
medium and large companies to achieve growth and income.  
In addition we manage an ethical bond fund and one global 
fund focused on international opportunities.

The Rathbone Managed Asset Portfolio Service provides a 
collective solution for private client investment.

Principal trading names

•  Rathbone Unit Trust Management

Direct employees (average full time equivalents)

•  29

Offices

•  London

Head of Unit Trusts

•  Mike Webb

Website

•  www.rutm.com

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategy and business performance

Clients 

What is important to us

How we achieve our aims

Our aim is to be a leading provider  
of high-quality, personalised 
investment management, trust,  
tax and pension advisory services  
to private clients, charities  
and trustees. 

The UK wealth management 
industry creates many  
opportunities for firms that can 
deliver a tailored and personal 
service to clients at reasonable 
cost. This is exactly what we  
do. Our reputation depends  
on providing a quality service  
to all of our clients and this  
is core to our strategy.

•  Focus on providing 

discretionary investment  
services through a direct  
relationship with an  
investment manager.

•  Ensure that the price of our  
services is fair, sustainable  
and competitive.

•  Provide choice to investment  
managers and clients across  
the global investment markets.

•  Provide timely support to  
investment managers in  
making asset allocation and  
stock selection decisions.

•  Invest in people and systems  
to support client service and  
breadth of investment choice.

Shareholders

What is important to us

How we achieve our aims

Our aim is to provide shareholders 
with a growing stream of dividend 
income, delivered by steady and 
consistent growth in earnings per 
share as market conditions allow. 

We believe that sustainable 
growth comes from providing  
a consistent quality service to 
clients, maintaining our strong 
reputation. We invest to grow 
and enhance what we offer to 
clients who have a range of 
different needs. We are mindful 
of regulatory developments and 
endeavour to respond to these 
in ways that protect long term 
value. We believe in open and  
transparent communication  
to the market and regulators 
and take regular soundings 
from investors.

•  Pursue acquisition  

opportunities which will  
increase shareholder value  
and, importantly, fit our culture.

•  Aspire to earn average  
revenue margins of  
approximately 1% on funds  
under management over  
the economic cycle.

•  Manage operating cost  

levels in line with growth  
in the size of the business  
as markets allow.

•  Incrementally invest in  
infrastructure to drive  
ongoing cost efficiency  
and service quality.

Employees 

 What is important to us

How we achieve our aims

Our aim is to provide staff with an 
interesting and stimulating career 
environment, encouraging all staff  
to share in the equity and profits  
of Rathbones, and to reward  
organic growth.

We promote a strong sense of 
integrity and trust among our 
staff that reflects how we build 
relationships with our clients. 
We invest in a robust 
investment culture that guides 
managers and evolves as 
markets change. Remuneration 
structures encourage behaviour 
that will produce value over the 
medium to longer term.

•  Ensure that all remuneration  

schemes are consistent, meet  
regulatory requirements and  
encourage appropriate  
behaviour.

•  Benchmark rewards to  

ensure that awards remain  
fair, competitive and aligned  
with shareholder interests.

•  Require directors to build up  
a meaningful shareholding  
over a five year period.

•  Offer share-based incentives  
to staff across the business.

•  Employ a recruitment process  
that ensures new employees  
fit our culture.

10 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
How we achieve our aims

•  Focus on providing 

discretionary investment  

services through a direct  

relationship with an  

investment manager.

•  Ensure that the price of our  

services is fair, sustainable  

and competitive.

•  Provide choice to investment  

managers and clients across  

the global investment markets.

•  Provide timely support to  

investment managers in  

making asset allocation and  

stock selection decisions.

•  Invest in people and systems  

to support client service and  

breadth of investment choice.

How we achieve our aims

•  Pursue acquisition  

opportunities which will  

increase shareholder value  

and, importantly, fit our culture.

•  Aspire to earn average  

revenue margins of  

approximately 1% on funds  

under management over  

the economic cycle.

•  Manage operating cost  

levels in line with growth  

in the size of the business  

as markets allow.

•  Incrementally invest in  

infrastructure to drive  

ongoing cost efficiency  

and service quality.

How we achieve our aims

•  Ensure that all remuneration  

schemes are consistent, meet  

regulatory requirements and  

encourage appropriate  

behaviour.

•  Benchmark rewards to  

ensure that awards remain  

fair, competitive and aligned  

with shareholder interests.

•  Require directors to build up  

a meaningful shareholding  

over a five year period.

•  Offer share-based incentives  

to staff across the business.

•  Employ a recruitment process  

that ensures new employees  

fit our culture.

Strategy and business performance continued

Measuring our success

Key performance indicators

Our net organic growth rates 
and number of clients are 
important indicators of how 
successful we are in attracting 
new clients and retaining  
existing relationships.

•  Manage functions in-house 

where we have scale  
to ensure that risks and  
services are managed  
to our high standards.

•  Encourage regular  

feedback from our clients  
and act upon it.

•  Offer unit trust and  

multi asset funds tailored  
to meet private client  
investment needs.

•  Provide supporting  

tax, trust and financial  
planning services.

Net organic growth rates in 
Investment Management funds 
under management %

  2011: 5.4

  2010: 5.3

  2009: 6.7

  2008: 7.4

  2007: 7.8

Total funds under  
management £bn

  2011: 15.85

  2010: 15.63

  2009: 13.10

  2008: 10.46

  2007: 13.12

Unit Trust funds under  
management £m

  2011: 1,085

  2010: 1,043

  2009: 935

  2008: 1,029

  2007: 1,887

Number of Investment 
Management clients ’000

  2011: 38.4

  2010: 37.4

  2009: 33.8

  2008: 31.2

  2007: 30.3

Measuring our success

Key performance indicators

•  Review supplier relationships 
to ensure we secure value  
for money.

•  Conservatively manage 

treasury assets within clear 
risk-based guidelines.

•  Provide clear management 

accountability for operational 
and business risks.

•  Maintain required capital  
and liquidity levels, having 
regard to market conditions, 
regulatory requirements  
and growth opportunities.

The simplicity of our business 
model means that profits, 
earnings per share and  
margins are good indicators  
of success for both investors 
and employees. We aim for 
stable dividend growth (with 
dividend cover typically  
ranging from 1x to 2x earnings 
depending on where we are  
in the economic cycle). Total 
shareholder return for the  
last five financial years is 
shown on page 8.

Profit before tax £’000

Earnings per share p

  2011: 39,152

  2010: 30,083

  2009: 29,468

  2008: 42,306

  2007: 47,302

  2011: 66.72

  2010: 49.76

  2009: 46.87

  2008: 67.57

  2007: 77.79

Operating margin %

Dividend per share p

  2011: 27.1

  2010: 23.7

  2009: 25.2

  2008: 32.3

  2007: 35.2

  2011: 46.0

  2010: 44.0

  2009: 42.0

  2008: 42.0

  2007: 41.0

Measuring our success

Key performance indicators

•  Provide training for staff, 

seeking the highest 
professional and personal 
standards.

•  Share ideas and best practice 
throughout the organisation 
through timely consultation 
and communication.

As a service-based business, 
we recognise that continuity of 
client service often means 
continuity of employees who 
are happy to promote and 
represent the firm. One way to 
measure our success is to look 
at how many people join and 
leave the organisation and  
how many employees receive 
SIP shares.

Staff costs as a percentage  
of operating expenses %

Average full time  
equivalent employees

  2011: 61.3

  2010: 60.8

  2009: 64.8

  2008: 65.1

  2007: 68.2

Number of shares held by  
SIP participants

  2011: 1,394,076

  2010: 1,316,557

  2009: 1,346,948

  2008: 1,290,392

  2007: 1,270,641

  2011: 746

  2010: 699

  2009: 681

  2008: 675

  2007: 644

Staff turnover %

  2011: 5

  2010: 6

  2009: 3

  2008: 6

  2007: 8

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

11

 
Business review

Investment Management

The Investment Management division principally provides 
discretionary investment management services delivered  
by Rathbone Investment Management to private investors  
and charities. Divisional results, however, also include  
those of closely related pension advisory services and,  
from 2011, taxation, trust and family office services  
which were previously reported as a separate segment.  
Comparative figures for 2010 have been restated to reflect 
this new presentation.

Year to year changes in the division’s key performance 
indicators are shown in table 1 below.

Table 1. Investment Management – key performance indicators

2011

2010

Funds under management at 31 December1

£14.76bn

£14.59bn

Underlying rate of net organic growth in Investment 

Management funds under management1

5.4%

5.3%

Underlying rate of total net growth in Investment 

Management funds under management1

Average net operating basis point return2

7.5%

84bps

10.2%

83bps

1  See table 2 
2  See table 5

Despite the difficult economic and investment conditions 
during 2011 Investment Management has continued to 
attract funds at a healthy rate throughout the year, both 
organically and from acquired growth. Organic inflows 
of funds under management represent the value of funds 
introduced during the year by new or existing clients to 
existing investment managers. Acquired growth represents 
new funds either from acquisitions or introduced by 
investment managers who have joined us recently.

Table 2. Investment Management – funds under management

As at 1 January
Inflows1

– organic
– acquired

Outflows1
Market adjustment2

As at 31 December

Net organic new business3

Underlying rate of net organic growth4

2011 
£bn

14.59
1.97

1.66
0.31

(0.87)
(0.93)

14.76

0.79

5.4%

2010 
£bn

12.16
2.06

1.46
0.60

(0.82)
1.19

14.59

0.64

5.3%

Underlying rate of total net growth5
 1  Value at the date of transfer in/(out) 
2  Represents the impact of market movements and the relative performance of funds 
  compared to the FTSE APCIMS Balanced Index 
3  Organic inflows less outflows 
4  Net organic new business as a % of opening funds under management 
5  Net organic new business and acquired inflows as a % of opening funds under management

7.5%

10.2%

Gross organic inflows of £1.66 billion in 2011 represent 
11.4% of funds under management at the start of the year 
(2010: 12.0%) and have remained at consistently high 
levels throughout the year. Net organic growth (stated after 
outflows) was also stable at 5.4% of opening funds under 
management (2010: 5.3%). Outflows of funds principally 
arise as clients withdraw capital and/or income from 
portfolios to meet other financial requirements or close their 
accounts. Outflows have continued at historical rates.

We continue to see growth across all parts of our business, 
largely as a result of referral from existing clients but with 
an increasing contribution from business referred to us by 
professional intermediaries. 

•   Charity funds under management of £1.68 billion at  

31 December 2011 are up 3.1% from £1.63 billion at  
31 December 2010.

•   The value of funds managed for clients introduced by 
provider panel relationships increased by 6.2% to  
£1.38 billion at 31 December 2011 from £1.30 billion  
at the start of the year.

•  Rathbone SIPP funds were £343 million at 31 December 
2011, an increase of 2.7% from £334 million at the 
start of the year.

Investment Week ‘Discretionary
Company of the Year’ award

Rathbones was named  
‘Discretionary Company of the Year’  
at the Investment Week Fund 
Manager of the Year Awards, held  
in July 2011. The award recognises 
the depth of research of our 
collectives research teams as  
voted for by all fund managers  
who themselves were short-listed  
for an award at the event.

Acquired funds under management totalled £305 million 
in 2011, representing clients introduced by investment 
managers who have recently joined Rathbones. Acquired 
growth in 2010 of £600 million included £421 million of 
funds resulting from our transaction with Lloyds Banking 
Group plc in 2009.

Total net organic and acquired growth has added £1.10 
billion of funds under management in 2011 representing 
a growth rate of 7.5% (2010: 10.2%). Funds under 
management of £14.76 billion at 31 December 2011 were 
1.2% higher than at the start of the year. The FTSE 100 
Index and the FTSE APCIMS Balanced Index dropped by 
5.6% and 2.8% respectively over the same period.

12 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
Business review continued

Investment Management continued 

Overall, 2011 was a difficult year across the market  
for performance as benchmarks tended to smooth out  
what were volatile movements at stock and fund level.  
Many Investment Management Association members 
underperformed benchmarks in the UK, USA and Europe  
and we also saw these trends in our own composite 
performance against the FTSE APCIMS Balanced Index, 
particularly in the fourth quarter.

The financial performance in the division is driven to a large 
extent by the total volume of funds under management and 
the net growth in new funds that the business manages to 
attract. Income is derived from: 

•   a sliding scale of investment management or advisory  
fees which are applied based on the value of clients’ 
funds under management;

•   commissions which are levied on transactions undertaken 

on behalf of clients; and

•   an interest margin earned on the cash held in  

client portfolios.

Table 3. Investment Management – financial performance

Net fee income2
Commission
Interest and other income3
Fees from advisory services4

Underlying net operating income
Underlying operating expenses5

Underlying profit before tax

2011 
£m

80.1
36.2
11.2
7.6

135.1
(89.7)

45.4

1
2010 
£m

66.5
35.7
10.2
7.4

119.8
(82.1)

37.7

Underlying operating % margin6

33.6%

31.5%

1  Comparatives restated due to re-presentation of segmental information (see note 1 to the 

consolidated financial statements)

2  Net fee income is stated after deducting fees and commission expenses paid to introducers
3  Interest and other income is presented net of interest expense paid on client accounts
4  Fees from advisory services include income from trust, tax and pensions advisory services
5  See table 6 
6  Underlying profit before tax divided by underlying net operating income

Charity Symposium

Rathbones’ second Annual  
Charity Symposium was held at the 
Merchant Taylors’ Hall in September. 
Charity trustees, advisers and  
charity investment managers came  
together to discuss the future of  
the charity sector with talks by guest 
speakers from the charity finance 
world and beyond. 

Net fee income increased by 20.5% from £66.5 million  
in 2010 to £80.1 million in 2011, benefiting from continuing 
growth, increased charges (introduced from the end of the 
first quarter of 2011) and market movements.

One change to our charges was the introduction of a  
new per account charge which we believe better reflects  
the costs of maintaining individual accounts and goes  
some way to paying for the increasing regulatory costs  
which we face. We believe that our charges are reasonable 
overall, taking into account our long-held stance on trail 
commission, which passes to clients the benefit of Rathbones 
being able to purchase collectives at institutional rates.  
Trail commission on collectives where institutional units 
were not available was £2.4 million in the year ended 
31 December 2011 (2010: £2.7 million), representing 
1.8% of underlying net operating income.

Net fee income is calculated based on the value of funds  
at our four quarterly valuation dates and is therefore also 
influenced by market movements. Average funds under 
management on these billing dates in 2011 were £14.76 
billion, up 10.1% from 2010 (reflecting market movements, 
investment performance and net new funds). The average 
FTSE 100 Index (measured on the same dates) was 5663  
in 2011 compared with an average of 5528 in 2010; an 
increase of 2.4% whilst the average FTSE APCIMS Balanced 
Index increased 2.6%.

Table 4. Investment Management – average funds under management

Valuation dates for billing
– 5 April
– 30 June
– 30 September
– 31 December

Average

Average FTSE 100 Index

2011 
£bn

2010 
£bn

14.98
15.27
14.04
14.76

14.76

5663

13.02
12.41
13.59
14.59

13.40

5528

Whilst market conditions in the first half were favourable  
for commission income, the change in market sentiment in 
the second half of 2011 reduced transaction volumes. Full 
year commission income of £36.2 million was 1.4% higher 
than in 2010.

Interest and other income of £11.2 million rose by 9.8% 
compared to £10.2 million in 2010 largely as a result of 
higher yields on treasury assets offset by a 4.4% reduction  
in average liquidity to £904 million over 2011. All of the 
above factors are reflected in the change to total revenue 
margin shown in table 5, which reports a return on average 
funds under management of 84 bps compared to 83 bps  
in 2010.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

13

 
 
Business review continued

Investment Management continued 

Unit Trusts

Table 5. Investment Management – revenue margins

Basis point return2
– fee income
– commission
– interest3

Basis point return on funds under management

2011 
bps

1
2010 
bps

54
25
5

84

51
26
6

83

1  Comparatives restated due to re-presentation of segmental information (see note 1 to the 
  consolidated financial statements) 
2  Underlying net operating income (see table 3) excluding interest on own reserves divided by 

the average funds under management on the quarterly billing dates (see table 4) 

3  Excluding fees from advisory services and interest on own reserves

Fees from advisory services of £7.6 million were 2.7% higher 
than in 2010 reflecting both higher fund-based charges and 
more chargeable hours worked.

Table 6. Investment Management – underlying operating expenses

Staff costs2
– fixed
– variable

Total staff costs2
Other operating expenses

Underlying operating expenses

Underlying cost/income ratio3

2011 
£m

31.6
15.8

47.4
42.3

89.7

1
2010 
£m

28.9
14.0

42.9
39.2

82.1

This division manages a range of unit trusts and OEICs 
which are distributed mainly through independent financial 
advisers (IFAs), fund supermarkets and other platforms in 
the UK. IFAs have a strong focus on investment performance 
and investors have a high propensity to switch funds if 
comparative investment performance falls.

Our range of directly invested funds is well established  
and the specialist focus creates a concentrated, active range 
of investment options which is highly attractive to investors 
seeking to add component parts to their own portfolios. 
Unit Trusts also runs the Rathbone Managed Asset Portfolio 
Service, which aims to provide an effective private client 
investment portfolio on a collective basis for clients with 
fewer investable assets. The managed portfolio service, also 
distributed principally via IFAs, consists of three unitised 
funds with a range of risk mandates. It presents a solution 
to the trend of outsourcing by IFAs in the lead-up to the 
Retail Distribution Review, especially when combined with 
Rathbone Investment Management’s discretionary services, 
providing advisers with solutions for investors from £1,000 
to larger institutional and private client accounts.

66.4%

68.5%

Appointment of  
Chief Operating Officer

In December Rathbones announced 
the appointment of Andrew Butcher 
(right) to the post of chief operating 
officer. He takes over from Paul 
Chavasse (below right), who becomes 
Rathbones’ head of investment 
management in March 2012. 

1  Comparatives restated due to re-presentation of segmental information (see note 1 to the 
  consolidated financial statements) 
2  Represents the costs of investment managers and teams directly involved in client  

facing activities 

3  Underlying operating expenses divided by underlying net operating income (see table 3)

Underlying operating expenses in Investment Management 
for 2011 were £89.7 million, compared to £82.1 million  
in 2010, an increase of 9.3%.

Fixed staff costs of £31.6 million increased by 9.3% year 
on year, principally reflecting the addition of new revenue 
generating staff and salary inflation. Higher profits resulted 
in higher variable staff costs year on year.

Average full time equivalent headcount of investment 
managers and teams involved in client facing activities  
was 533 in 2011 compared to 496 in 2010.

Other operating expenses of £42.3 million include  
property, depreciation, settlement, IT, finance and other 
central support services costs. The year to year increase  
of £3.1 million (7.9%) largely reflects higher marketing 
spend, a busy project agenda, and investment in IT. We have 
also invested in revising and improving over 200 pieces of 
client documentation during the last year. In addition to  
our new brochures, account opening packs and updates to 
our terms of business, we have improved the quality and 
content of our investment literature and publications to 
charities and professional intermediaries, all of which have 
received very positive feedback from both clients  
and investment managers.

14 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Business review continued

  Unit Trusts continued 

  Table 7. Unit Trusts – key performance indicators

Funds under management at 31 December

£1.09bn

£1.04bn

2011

2010

Underlying rate of net growth in funds 

under management1

1  See table 8

9.6%

(3.2%)

The retail asset management sector continued to recover 
in the first half of 2011, although net retail sales of 
£18.0 billion in 2011 (as reported by the Investment 
Management Association) were down 38.6% on 2010. The 
global uncertainty during the summer caused industry sales 
to drop significantly as investors sought safer havens for 
their assets. Despite this general aversion to risk assets, and 
in contrast with some other unit trust managers, Rathbone 
Unit Trust Management saw positive monthly net sales of 
its funds throughout 2011.

  Table 8. Unit Trusts – funds under management

As at 1 January
Net inflows/(outflows)

– inflows1
– outflows1

Market adjustments2

As at 31 December

Underlying rate of net growth3

1  Value at the date of transfer in/(out) 
2  Impact of market movements and relative performance 
3  Net inflows/(outflows) as a % of opening funds under management

2011 
£bn

1.04
0.10

0.24
(0.14)

(0.05)

1.09

9.6%

2010 
£bn

0.94
(0.03)

0.15
(0.18)

0.13

1.04

(3.2%)

Net inflows of funds under management in 2011 were  
£97 million, compared to a net outflow of £30 million  
in 2010. As a result, funds under management increased 
4.8% to £1.09 billion at 31 December 2011 from £1.04 
billion at the start of the year. At 31 December the value  
of assets managed in each fund was as follows:

  Table 9. Unit Trusts – fund assets

In contrast to recent years, Unit Trusts maintained net 
sales throughout the year as the improvements in fund 
performance during 2010 were consolidated during 2011 
and this was reflected in the funds’ three year track records 
(see table 10). In particular the Rathbone Income Fund 
moved from third quartile to first, measured over three 
years, as its longer term investment strategy bore fruit. 
The Rathbone Global Opportunities Fund remained first 
quartile over both one and three years. This is important as 
many major fund buyers and rating agencies place specific 
focus on this time period. The Rathbone Ethical Bond Fund 
underperformed in 2011 as its ethical mandate does not 
permit it to invest in UK Gilts, which were the best performing 
asset class held by competing funds in the sector.

Table 10. Unit Trusts – fund performance

Quartile ranking over:

1 year

3 years

5 years

Blue Chip Income and Growth Fund
Ethical Bond Fund
Global Opportunities Fund
Income Fund
Recovery Fund1

3
4
1
2
3

2
1
1
1
n/a

3
3
1
3
n/a

1  Performance data for the Rathbone Recovery Fund is not yet available beyond 1 year as the 
fund was launched on 13 July 2009; performance data for the Rathbone Strategic Bond 

  Fund is not yet available as the fund was launched on 3 October 2011

In 2011 we extended our range of funds with the launch 
of two new products. The Rathbone Enhanced Growth 
Portfolio, which sits within the Rathbone Multi Asset 
Portfolio Service, was launched on 1 August 2011. The fund 
completes our offering in the multi asset space as we are 
now able to tailor investments across a range of investor 
risk profiles. By the end of 2011, the Rathbone Enhanced 
Growth Portfolio had added £7.0 million to the value of 
funds under management. The Rathbone Strategic Bond 
Fund was soft-launched on 3 October 2011, seeded with 
£10.3 million of funds from the portfolios of existing private 
clients who are looking for a more strategic exposure to 
fixed interest securities. By 31 December 2011, the fund 
managed £14.5 million of assets.

Rathbone Income Fund
Rathbone Global Opportunities Fund
Rathbone Blue Chip Income and Growth Fund
Rathbone Ethical Bond Fund
Rathbone Recovery Fund
Rathbone Multi Asset Portfolios 
Other

2011 
£m

453
136
60
79
62
100
195

2010 
£m

483
105
59
54
69
74
199

Unit Trusts fund launches

In 2011 Rathbone Unit Trust 
Management added the Rathbone 
Enhanced Growth Portfolio, managed 
by David Coombs (right), to its range 
of multi asset funds and launched the 
Rathbone Strategic Bond Fund 
managed by Bryn Jones (left).

1,085

1,043

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

15

 
 
Business review continued

Unit Trusts continued 

Table 11. Unit Trusts – financial performance

Initial charges net of discounts
Annual management charges
Net dealing profits
Interest and other income

Rebates and trail commission payable

Net operating income
Underlying operating expenses

Underlying profit before tax

Operating % margin1

Fixed staff costs of £2.5 million for year ended 31 December 
2011 were 13.6% higher than the previous year due to 
salary inflation and an increase in the average full time 
equivalent headcount over the year to 29. The rise in 
headcount was driven by the full year impact of recruitment 
in 2010 to strengthen the sales team.

Variable staff costs of £1.1 million were down 8.3% on 
2010 as the impact of spreading higher profit share awards 
in 2007 and 2008 fell out of the division’s results in 2011. 
Table 13 demonstrates the impact of deferred profit share 
awards on 2011 variable costs.

2011 
£m

0.5
13.9
0.5
0.2

15.1
(6.9)

8.2
(7.4)

0.8

2010 
£m

0.5
12.5
0.2
0.1

13.3
(5.9)

7.4
(6.6)

0.8

9.8%

10.8%

Table 13. Unit Trusts – variable staff costs

Total variable staff costs
Deferred profit share adjustment

Variable awards for the financial year

2011 
£m

1.1
–

1.1

2010 
£m

1.2
(0.3)

0.9

Share of profit allocated to variable rewards1

57.9%

45.0%

1  Variable staff costs excluding deferred profit share as a % of underlying profit before tax 
  and total variable staff costs

Other operating expenses have increased by 18.8% to 
£3.8 million, principally as a result of the larger sales team 
increasing marketing and travel costs during the year.  
The share of central overheads absorbed by the division has 
increased in line with the growth in headcount compared  
to 2010.

Charity trustee training

Throughout February and March 
2011, Alex Dow (left) from our charity 
team and Liz Savage (right) from our 
research team presented eight 
successful training sessions to a 
number of charity trustees.

1  Unit Trusts underlying profit before tax divided by net operating income

Annual management charges (calculated based on the  
daily value of the funds under management) increased 
11.2% from £12.5 million in 2010 to £13.9 million in 2011, 
largely driven by a rise in average funds under management. 
Annual management charges as a percentage of average 
funds under management remained consistent at 1.3% 
(2010: 1.3%). Rebates and trail commission payable as a 
percentage of annual management charge income increased 
to 49.6% compared to 47.2% in 2010 as a consequence  
of the continued negotiating power of distributors, in 
particular the national platforms and fund supermarkets.

Net dealing profits increased to £0.5 million in 2011 from  
£0.2 million in the previous year as a consequence of the increase 
in sales. Net operating income as a percentage of average funds 
under management was 0.8% in 2011 compared to 0.7% in 2010.

As a consequence of the Retail Distribution Review, we  
are planning to issue ‘institutional’ share classes in all of  
our funds in 2012. The institutional units will carry lower 
annual management charges but will also not incur any 
rebate. Taking into account the current level of rebates paid, 
it is not expected that these units will have a material impact 
on Unit Trusts’ performance.

Table 12. Unit Trusts – underlying operating expenses

Staff costs
– fixed
– variable

Total staff costs
Other operating expenses

Underlying operating expenses

Underlying cost/income ratio1

2011 
£m

2010 
£m

2.5
1.1

3.6
3.8

7.4

2.2
1.2

3.4
3.2

6.6

90.2%

89.2%

1  Underlying operating expenses as a % of net operating income (see table 11)

16 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

  
Financial review

Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income

Table 14. Extracts from the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income

Operating income

Underlying profit before tax1

Underlying operating % margin2

Profit before tax 

Effective tax rate

Taxation

Profit after tax 

Earnings per share

Dividend per share3

2011 
£m 
(unless stated)

2010 
£m 
(unless stated)

144.5

46.2

32.2%

39.2

127.2

38.5

30.3%

30.1

26.7%

28.4%

(10.4)

28.7

(8.5)

21.6

66.72p

49.76p

46.0p

44.0p

1  Profit before tax excluding gains on disposal of financial securities, exceptional levies to 

the Financial Services Compensation Scheme, amortisation of acquired client relationship 
intangibles and head office relocation costs

2  Underlying profit before tax as a % of operating income, excluding gains on disposal of 

financial securities

3  The total interim and final dividend proposed for the financial year

Operating income

The Group’s operating income has increased 13.6% to 
£144.5 million in 2011, driven mainly by higher fee and 
commission income from steadily growing funds under 
management. Operating income in 2011 includes 
£1.1 million of gains on disposal of financial securities  
which are excluded from underlying results (see below).

Underlying profit before tax/operating margin

Segment performance in the business review is presented 
on an underlying basis, as it is considered to be a better 
reflection of the core performance of the Group’s activities. 
Adjusted measures such as ‘underlying profit before tax’ 
and ‘underlying earnings per share’ are followed by research 
analysts covering the Group. Consolidated underlying profit 
before tax increased 20.0% in the year to £46.2 million, up 
from £38.5 million in 2010. 

Items of income and expense falling in the categories 
explained below are excluded from the Group’s underlying 
results. Whilst such items continue to represent a material 
impact on the Group’s results, we consider it appropriate  
to disclose their impact and focus our financial review of the 
year on an underlying basis. A full reconciliation between 
underlying profit and profit attributable to shareholders is 
provided in note 12 to the consolidated financial statements.

Gains on disposal of financial securities
Included within operating income in 2011 is a non-recurring 
gain of £1.1 million from the sale of certain financial assets 
that were previously held in nominee accounts. Time has 
demonstrated that any claims against these assets had been 
exhausted and they have been recognised with FSA approval. 
No such gains were recognised in 2010.

Exceptional levies to the Financial Services  
Compensation Scheme (FSCS)
The global financial crisis in 2008 precipitated the failure 
of a number of financial services businesses, which in turn 
placed demands on the FSCS to compensate investors. As an 
asset management group with a banking licence Rathbones 
is potentially exposed to levies from a number of industry 
sectors. The element of these levies that relates to the normal 
costs of the FSCS is reported within other operating expenses 
as it is a recurring cost of doing business in the financial 
services sector. However, to the extent that significant 
additional levies arise from the failure of businesses 
not associated with Rathbones, they are excluded from 
underlying results.

In 2010, an exceptional levy of £3.6 million was incurred, 
largely as a result of the failure of Keydata Investment 
Services Limited and other intermediaries. No additional 
levies have been made by the FSCS in 2011 and the full cost 
of the 2011 levies has accordingly been recognised within 
underlying performance.

Amortisation of client relationships
Client relationship intangible assets are created in the  
course of acquiring funds under management. As the 
amortisation charges associated with these assets represents 
a significant non-cash item, this has been excluded from 
underlying profit which represents largely cash-based 
earnings. Charges for amortisation of client relationship 
intangibles in the year ended 31 December 2011 were  
£5.1 million (2010: £4.8 million).

10 years of Rathbones 
in Cambridge

2011 marked the Rathbones 
Cambridge office’s tenth year of 
business in the city.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

17

 
 
 
Financial review continued

Underlying profit before tax/operating margin continued 

Earnings per share and dividends

Basic earnings per share for the year ended 31 December 
2011 were 66.72p, up 34.1% on 49.76p in 2010. This 
increase reflects the growth in the Group’s profitability, 
compounded by the reduction in the effective tax rate.  
On an underlying basis the Group’s earnings per share 
increased by 23.6% to 78.79p in 2011 (see note 12 to  
the consolidated financial statements). 

In light of the results for the year, the Board have proposed  
an increased final dividend for 2011 of 29p. This results  
in a full year dividend of 46p, 2p higher than 2010. The 
proposed dividend is covered 1.45 times by basic earnings  
and 1.71 times by underlying earnings.

Brand refresh

Rathbones undertook a brand 
realignment over the course of 2011 
which included the redesign and 
repurposing of our marketing 
materials, all of our websites and  
the investment management client 
account opening documentation.

Relocation costs of the London head office
In February 2012, the Group is relocating its London 
head office to 1 Curzon Street, taking advantage of the 
opportunity to bring its 295 people based in London 
together, with most sitting on the same floor of a single 
building. Charges of £3.0 million associated with this 
move have been separately highlighted and excluded from 
underlying profit due to their material and non-recurring 
nature. A full analysis of the elements of this cost is  
provided in note 8 to the consolidated financial statements.

We expect that approximately £1.1 million of further costs 
in relation to this will be recognised in 2012 as we complete 
the move.

The Group’s underlying operating margin, which is 
calculated as the ratio of underlying profit before tax 
to operating income excluding gains from the disposal 
of financial securities, improved to 32.2% in 2011. The 
increase from 30.3% in 2010 is largely due to the realisation 
of full income benefits from recent acquisitions, higher 
charges and continued cost control.

Taxation

The tax charge for 2011 was £10.4 million  
(2010: £8.5 million), which represents an effective tax rate  
of 26.7% of profit before income tax (2010: 28.4%).

The effective tax rate has fallen since 2010 primarily  
due to a reduction in the UK corporation tax rate for the 
current year and an over-provision for tax in the prior year 
compared to final tax computations. These effects have  
been offset in part by the fall in value of deferred tax assets 
due to lower future years’ corporation tax rates in the UK. 
The effective tax rate is slightly higher than the derived  
UK standard rate of corporation tax of 26.5% as the 
impact of disallowable expenses has been largely offset by 
the impact of over-provision in 2010. A full reconciliation 
of the income tax expense is provided in note 10 to the 
consolidated financial statements.

18 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

Financial review continued

Consolidated balance sheet and  
capital resources

Table 15. Extracts from the consolidated balance sheet and  
components of regulatory capital

Capital resources
– Total equity
– Tier 1 capital ratio1

Other resources
– Treasury assets2
– Intangible assets from acquired growth3
– Tangible assets4
– Total assets

Liabilities
– Deposits by banks (short term debt financing) 
– Client deposits (cash in banking-client portfolios)5
– Retirement benefit obligations

2011 
£m

2010 
£m

190.7
26.9%

185.4
28.3%

909.6
88.8
14.7
1,183.8

0.5
908.7
7.3

790.6
88.2
9.6
1,028.1

3.3
762.0
6.6

1  Tier 1 capital as a proportion of total risk weighted assets, calculated on a Basel III basis
2  Investment securities, excluding available for sale equity investments
3  Net book value of acquired client relationships and goodwill
4  Net book value of property, plant and equipment and computer software
5  Total amounts due to customers

As required under FSA rules we perform an Internal 
Capital Adequacy Assessment Process annually, which 
includes performing a range of stress tests to determine the 
appropriate level of regulatory capital that the Group needs 
to hold. In addition, we monitor a wide range of capital 
and liquidity statistics on a daily, monthly or less frequent 
basis as required. Capital levels are forecast on a monthly 
basis, taking account of proposed dividends and investment 
requirements, to ensure that appropriate buffers are 
maintained. Investment of proprietary funds is controlled  
by our treasury department.

The Group’s Tier 1 capital ratio, calculated on a Basel III 
basis, of 26.9% is much higher than the industry norm 
and reflects the low risk nature of the Group’s banking 
activity and the lack of debt financing. The Tier 1 ratio has 
fallen from 28.3% at the previous year end, mainly due to 
the downgrading of certain treasury counterparties’ credit 
ratings by the rating agencies, which has increased total  
risk weighted assets.

Capital resources

Treasury assets

The Group’s balance sheet remains healthy with total equity 
of £190.7 million at 31 December 2011, up 2.9% from 
£185.4 million at the end of 2010. Rathbones is strongly 
capitalised and does not rely on wholesale markets to fund 
its operations. In April 2011 the Group’s term loan was 
fully repaid and the only debt remaining on the consolidated 
balance sheet is £0.5 million of overnight cash-book 
overdraft balances.

Total assets at 31 December 2011 were £1,184 million 
(2010: £1,028 million), of which £909 million (2010: £762 
million) represents the cash held in banking-client portfolios. 

Regulatory capital

Rathbones is classified as a banking group under the  
Capital Requirements Directive and is required to operate 
within a wide range of restrictions on capital resources and 
banking exposures that are prescribed by the prudential  
rules of the Financial Services Authority (FSA). The Group’s  
Pillar III disclosures are published annually on our website  
(www.rathbones.com/investor-relations/financial-analysis/
pillar-3-disclosures) and provide further details about 
regulatory capital resources and requirements.

As a licensed deposit taker, Rathbone Investment 
Management holds the Group’s surplus liquidity on its 
balance sheet together with clients’ cash held on a banking 
basis. Cash in client portfolios of £908.7 million, including 
amounts held in client money accounts, represented 5.7% of 
total investment management funds at 31 December 2011 
compared to 4.9% and £762.0 million at the end of 2010. 

The treasury department of Rathbone Investment 
Management, reporting through the banking committee to 
the Board, operates in accordance with procedures set out in 
a Board-approved treasury manual and monitors exposure to 
market, credit and liquidity risk, as set out in note 28 to the 
consolidated financial statements. The treasury department 
invests in a range of securities issued by a relatively large 
number of counterparties. Counterparties must be ‘A’ rated 
or higher by Fitch and are regularly reviewed by the banking 
committee to ensure ratings remain appropriate.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

19

 
Financial review continued

Treasury assets continued 

Capital expenditure

In 2011 we saw increased demand for client loans, which 
we see as an important part of building our relationship 
with clients. We operate very conservative lending policies 
whereby loans are generally secured against the value of 
the portfolio that we manage. Outstanding loans to clients 
totalled £47.8 million at the end of 2011 (£40.0 million at 
the end of 2010).

Intangible assets

Intangible assets arise principally from acquired growth in 
funds under management and are categorised as goodwill 
and client relationships. At 31 December 2011, the total 
value of intangible assets arising from acquired growth was 
£88.8 million (2010: £88.2 million). During the year, client 
relationship intangible assets of £5.7 million were capitalised 
(2010: £14.3 million, including £9.8 million resulting 
from the transaction with Lloyds Banking Group plc). No 
goodwill was acquired during 2010 or 2011. Further details 
on the Group’s intangible assets are provided in note 19 to 
the consolidated financial statements.

Goodwill is not amortised, but is subject to a test for 
impairment at least annually. No goodwill was found 
to be impaired during 2010 or 2011. Client relationship 
intangibles are amortised over the estimated life of the 
client relationship, generally over a period of ten to fifteen 
years. When client relationships are lost, any related 
intangible is derecognised in the year. The total amortisation 
charge for client relationships, including the impact of lost 
relationships, in 2011 was £5.1 million (2010: £4.8 million).

At the end of June 2011, we made the final consideration 
payment for the Lloyds transaction that was completed 
in December 2009. This transaction has introduced some 
3,100 new clients to Rathbones, for whom we managed 
£755 million of funds at 31 December 2011. The total 
consideration for the transaction of £20.7 million represents 
2.7% of the value of these acquired funds.

London office move

Rathbones’ London head office 
moves to new premises at  
1 Curzon Street in the heart of 
Mayfair in February 2012.

We have continued to invest for future growth during 2011, 
with capitalised expenditure on our premises and systems 
totalling £9.0 million (2010: £4.4 million). We continue to 
work at improving the efficiency of our systems and our 
back office and the investment in new systems continues at 
a steady pace. Although some of this is driven by regulatory 
change, much is driven by our desire to serve our clients to 
the best of our ability and give our investment managers 
the tools they need to manage portfolios more easily. We 
continue to develop our investment process and during 
the year there have been significant improvements to the 
information available to investment managers via the 
internal network and also the publication on a quarterly 
basis of the Rathbones research pack which highlights the 
preferred investments in a large number of asset classes.

We are also implementing a system which will  
ultimately replace paper files and facilitates more efficient 
management of email and written correspondence both  
to and from clients.

As part of the continuing improvement of our IT 
infrastructure, we moved our London data centre to a site in 
North London which not only secured us some cost savings, 
but also gave us much greater flexibility and resilience 
around our IT infrastructure. This was a very significant 
effort as it relocated some critical equipment from our 
London office into a dedicated and controlled site  
provided by a third party. 

Capital expenditure on property has increased significantly 
in 2011 as a result of the relocation of our London head 
office in February 2012. In total, £4.8 million of fit-out and 
related costs have been capitalised on the new property  
and a further £3.0 million of related costs have been charged 
against profit in 2011. Additional detail on the costs  
incurred in 2011 is given in note 8 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

In 2012, we plan to continue to invest to improve our 
Rhymesight operating platform to improve workflow and 
make more tools available to investment managers. In 
addition we will seek to significantly upgrade our client and 
advisor internet connectivity through the development of  
a web portal.

20 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Financial review continued

Pensions

Liquidity and cash flow

The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes, 
both of which are closed to new members, and contributes to 
other post retirement benefit plans for its staff.

During 2011, we undertook the actuarial funding valuations 
of both defined benefit schemes as at 31 December 2010, 
bringing forward the valuation for the Laurence Keen 
Scheme to harmonise the valuation dates. As a result of the 
funding valuations, we have increased our assumptions for 
longevity of scheme members in line with the latest data 
available on mortality.

Given the volatility of the market and these updated 
assumptions, it is no surprise that our pension scheme 
deficits have also been volatile in 2011. At 31 December 
2011, the combined accounting deficit on the two defined 
benefit schemes was £7.3 million (2010: £6.6 million). This 
increase is mainly due to a reduction in the long term interest 
rate used to discount the schemes’ future liabilities and the 
extension of longevity expectations noted above. Full details 
of the assumptions underlying the accounting valuation 
and associated sensitivities are included in note 24 to the 
consolidated financial statements.

Funding valuations are required to be more prudent than 
valuations used for financial reporting, which must be based 
on management’s best estimate of the schemes’ position. 
Based on the updated funding valuations, we have agreed 
to maintain the existing schedule of deficit reduction 
contributions, subject to the schemes remaining in deficit.

Regular annual contributions to the schemes for ongoing 
service by scheme members have been reduced from  
£3.7 million to £2.5 million, principally as a result of the 
changes made to the scheme rules in 2010 linking members’ 
pensions for future service to career average earnings  
rather than final salary.

Digital strategy

The digital marketing strategy for 
Rathbones was developed in 2011, 
resulting in a new website written and 
built from scratch, a smartphone app 
and a social media strategy.

www.rathbones.com 

Table 16. Extracts from the consolidated statement of cash flows

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

2011 
£m

129.9

177.3

50.8

2010 
£m

79.1 

45.4 

(60.0)

Fee income is largely collected directly from client  
portfolios and expenses by and large are predictable; 
consequently Rathbones operates with a modest amount of 
working capital. Larger cash flows are principally generated 
from banking/treasury operations when investment managers 
make investment and asset allocation decisions about the 
amount of cash to be held in client portfolios. As a bank, 
Rathbones is subject to the FSA’s Individual Liquidity 
Adequacy Assessment regime, which requires us to hold a 
suitable liquid assets buffer to ensure that short term 
liquidity requirements can be met under certain stressed 
scenarios. Liquidity risks are actively managed on a  
daily basis and depend on operational and investment 
transaction activity.

Cash and cash equivalents, as defined by accounting 
standards, includes cash, money market funds and banking 
deposits which had an original maturity of less than three 
months. This definition represents only a portion of the 
Group’s treasury assets.

Net cash flows from operating activities include the effect 
of changes in banking-client deposits, which increased 
by £146.6 million during 2011. The cash inflow from 
these deposits, less the net £92.9 million used to purchase 
investment securities, principally comprises the net increase 
in cash and cash equivalents during the year.

The most significant non-operating cash flows during the 
year were as follows:

•  Outflows relating to the payment of dividends of  

£19.5 million (2010: £18.2 million).

•  £6.9 million of capital expenditure on property,  

plant and equipment (2010: £2.7 million), including  
£4.8 million paid in relation to the relocation of the 
London head office.

•  Outflows relating to intangible asset additions  
of £5.8 million (2010: £27.7 million, of which  
£22.8 million was paid in respect of the Lloyds  
Banking Group plc transaction).

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

21

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial review continued

Going concern 

Details of the Group’s business activities, results, cash flows 
and resources, together with the risks it faces and other 
factors likely to affect its future development, performance 
and position are set out in the chairman’s statement,  
chief executive’s statement, strategy and business 
performance, business review, financial review and risk 
management report. In addition, notes 28 and 29 to the 
consolidated financial statements provide further details.

The Company is regulated by the FSA and performs 
annual capital adequacy assessments which include the 
modelling of certain extreme stress scenarios. The Company 
publishes Pillar III disclosures annually on its website which 
provide detail about its regulatory capital resources and 
requirements. Since 6 April 2011, the Group has had no 
external borrowings and is fully equity financed.

In 2011, the Group has continued to generate organic 
growth in client funds under management despite the 
unhelpful market conditions, and this is expected to 
continue. The directors believe that the Company is well 
placed to manage its business risks successfully despite the 
continuing uncertain economic and political outlook.

As the directors have a reasonable expectation that the 
Company has adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future, they continue to adopt  
the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the  
annual financial statements. In forming their view, the  
directors have considered the Company’s prospects for a  
period exceeding 12 months from the date the financial 
statements are approved.

The chairman’s statement, chief executive’s statement, strategy and business 
performance, business review, financial review and risk management report have 
been prepared in line with guidance provided by the Accounting Standards Board 
to provide a balanced picture of Rathbones’ business and prospects, without 
prejudicing the confidential nature of commercially sensitive information.

They contain certain forward-looking statements which are made by the  
directors in good faith based on the information available to them at the time  
of their approval of this review. Statements contained within the business  
review should be treated with some caution due to the inherent uncertainties, 
including economic, regulatory and business risk factors, underlying any such 
forward-looking statements. The business review has been prepared by  
Rathbone Brothers Plc to provide information to its shareholders and should  
not be relied upon by any other party or for any other purpose.

22 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Risk management report

Rathbones has a clear risk management framework,  
the key objective of which is to identify and manage risk 
within a Board-approved risk appetite. The Board believes 
that the most effective way of achieving this is by embedding 
risk management throughout the organisation. We achieve 
this by ensuring that all identified risks are owned by specific 
committees who have responsibility for risk identification  
and risk management. These committees in turn report  
to the risk management committee, which takes a more 
holistic view of risk, identifying trends and correlations and 
providing guidance to other committees and to the Board.
This approach allows for risk decisions to be taken at  
the most appropriate level and also be subject to robust 
review and challenge.

Ian Buckley is the executive director with oversight 
responsibility for risk management. The risk management 
committee comprises all members of the group executive 
committee, together with the group heads of personnel, 
compliance and internal audit. During 2011, two  
non-executive directors, Oliver Corbett and Kathryn 
Matthews, became members of the committee and on  
1 March 2012 Kathryn Matthews will become chairman  
of the committee.

The responsibilities of the risk management  
committee include:

•   advising the Board on the Group’s overall risk appetite 
and risk strategy, taking into account the current and 
prospective macroeconomic and financial environment;

•   overseeing the current risk exposures of the Group;

•   reviewing the risk assessment processes;

•   supporting the Board’s assessment of any proposed 

strategic business change; and

•   assessing reports on any material breaches of risk limits 
and the adequacy of proposed management action.

The full remit of the committee is detailed within its terms  
of reference, which is subject to annual review and approval  
by the Board. The risk management committee meets on a 
quarterly basis. The risk management framework is broadly 
unchanged from 2010.

Risk appetite

Rathbones’ risk appetite is defined as the level of risk it is 
prepared to accept, within defined tolerance levels, in the 
pursuit of its strategic objectives. The Board recognises that 
taking risks is a normal part of running a business, and that  
the business will necessarily bear losses from financial and 
operational and IT risks which may manifest themselves either 
as reductions in income or directly or indirectly as operating  
or opportunity costs. The Board is committed to mitigating 
such losses as much as possible, but would be prepared  
to accept loss of up to £10 million in any five year period  
before it materially changes the current business model.

Risk register

A risk register is maintained which is considered the  
principal tool for monitoring risks. During 2011, for 
reporting purposes, we completed an exercise to classify  
each major financial and non-financial risk facing the Group 
as a financial, business or operational and IT risk. These 
risks are assessed by management as having a potential 
material impact on the Company. The 13 major risks are 
listed below in alphabetical order, grouped within the wider 
risk categories, together with details of the key mitigators.  
These are not exhaustive listings.

Risk scoring

During 2011 changes were made to the risk scoring 
methodology adopted by Rathbones, as approved by the risk 
management committee. Each risk is now assessed using a  
1 – 4 scoring system; previously a 1 – 5 approach had been 
utilised. The rationale for this reduction is to remove the 
tendency, inadvertent or otherwise, to default to the median.

Each risk is rated by assessing the probability of the risk 
occurring and its impact if it does occur. The inherent risk  
is then reduced given an assessment of the internal controls 
environment or by insurance to give a residual risk score.

Probability  

Score 

Impact 

High 

Medium 

Low 

Very low 

80% chance of risk being  
realised in a 5 year period 

60% chance of risk being  
realised in a 5 year period 

40% chance of risk being  
realised in a 5 year period 

20% chance of risk being  
realised in a 5 year period 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Significant to severe 
Over £10.0 million 

Moderate to significant 
Between £2.5 and £10.0 million

Low to moderate 
Between £1.0 and £2.5 million 

Insignificant 
Less than £1.0 million

Score

4 

3 

2 

1 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

23

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Risk management report continued

Risk scoring continued

High 

Medium 

Low 

Very low 

e
c
n
e
r
r
u
c
c
o
f
o
y
t
i
l
i

b
a
b
o
r
P

4

3

2

1

0

0  

Financial risks

Risk  

Credit 

Liquidity 

Market 

Low level 
risks

1  
Very low  

Medium level 
risks

2  
Low  

Impact of risk 

High level 
risks

3  
Medium 

4
High

Definition 

Key mitigators 

Credit risk is the risk of a market 
counterparty defaulting on monies deposited  
with it, or a counterparty failing to fulfil their 
contractual obligations.

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group 
will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations 
associated with financial liabilities that  
are settled by delivering cash or another 
financial asset.

Market risk includes interest rate risk, foreign 
exchange risk and price risk. Market risk is the  
risk that the Company’s earnings or capital will  
be adversely affected by changes in the level  
or volatility of interest rates, foreign currency 
exchange rates or market prices.

•  Robust counterparty limits.

•  Active monitoring of exposure.

•  Annual Individual Liquidity Adequacy 
Assessment (including stress testing).

•  Daily reporting to senior management.

•  Documented policies and procedures.

•  Daily monitoring.

•  Robust application of policy and  

investment limits.

Further detailed discussion of the Group’s exposures to financial risks is included in note 28 to the consolidated financial statements.

24 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Risk management report continued

Business risks

Risk  

Competition 

Legal and compliance 

Regulatory 

Reputational 

Definition 

Key mitigators 

Competition risk covers material loss of 
clients, and a reduced ability to grow the 
business, as well as key staff loss. Key staff 
loss is the risk of losing either a member  
of the group executive committee, a key 
investment professional or a senior manager. 
This could have a negative effect on either  
the growth of the business or the retention  
of existing business. 

Legal and compliance risk includes the risk 
of potential loss arising from litigation, as a 
result of a breach of legislative requirements, 
such as Companies Act requirements, data 
protection, employment law or health and 
safety regulations. 

Regulatory risk is the risk that a change in
regulation will materially affect the market in  
which Rathbones operates and increase the  
risk of non-compliance. 

Reputational risk covers the risk that 
negative publicity will lead to a loss of income 
for Rathbones or litigation. It also includes 
investment performance risk, which is the risk 
that portfolios and/or funds fail to achieve 
performance benchmarks, leading to client 
dissatisfaction. Reputational damage is more 
likely to arise following the materialisation  
of another risk factor rather than as a 
standalone risk.

Business
•  Regular reviews of pricing structure.

•  Continued investment in marketing, the 

investment process and service standards.

Staff
•  Competitive remuneration packages.

•  Investment in staff training and development.

•  Contractual clauses with restrictive covenants.

•  Retained specialist legal advisers.

•  Compliance department.

•  Data protection policy.

•  Documented policies, procedures  

and practices.

•  Comprehensive compliance monitoring.

•  Awareness of regulatory developments.

•  Active involvement with representative 

industry bodies.

•  Close contact with the regulators.

•  Strong compliance culture.

•  Treating customers fairly governance.

•  Monitoring of media coverage.

•  Proactive communications with 
shareholders/investor relations.

•  Investment process.

•  Investment management performance 

monitoring.

•  Investment in staff training and development.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

25

 
 
 
Risk management report continued

Operational and IT risks

Risk  

Definition 

Key mitigators 

Business continuity 

Data integrity 

Outsourcing 

Processing 

Business continuity risk is the risk of an
event arising which could have a material 
impact on the operations of the business.  
This includes the inability to recover IT  
systems or the restricted or denied access  
to office premises.

Data integrity risk includes the risks associated
with breaches of client confidentiality, as  
well as potential failures with the maintenance, 
accuracy and consistency of stored data.

Outsourcing risk is the risk of failure in 
respect of the provision of services by a third 
party. Any significant disruption to services,  
or deterioration in the performance of a key 
supplier, could have a negative impact on the 
ability of Rathbones to deliver services to  
our clients.

Processing risk includes the potential risk of 
loss of client or company assets through 
inadequate or failed internal processes and 
systems or fraud. 

Project management 
and control 

Project management and control risks cover
those areas of uncertainty which can arise and
have a negative impact on the performance 
or delivery of a project either in terms of  
duration, cost or in meeting requirements. 

Settlement 

Settlement risk is the risk that a counterparty 
will fail to deliver the terms of a contract at the  
time of settlement. 

•  Documented disaster recovery and  
crisis/incident management plans.

•  Regular disaster recovery testing.

•  Continuous monitoring of IT systems 

availability.

•  Off-site data centre.

•  System access controls.

•  Policy and procedures. 

•  Active relationship management, including 

regular service review meetings.

•  Service level agreements and monitoring  

of key performance indicators. 

•  Dealing limits and supporting system controls.

•  Continued investment in automated processes.

•  Counter review/4-eyes processes.

•  Segregation of duties.

•  Documented procedures.

•  Annual controls assessment including an 

ISAE3402 report.

•  Documented IT strategy.

•  Two-stage assessment, challenge and 

approval of project plans.

•  Dedicated projects office function.

•  Evolutionary system changes, with close  

user involvement.

•  Daily monitoring of settlement performance.

•  Delivery versus payment approach 

wherever possible.

•  Automated processes.

•  Authorisation and management oversight.

26 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our responsibility

28	

Corporate	responsibility	report

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report	and	accounts	2011  

27

 
Corporate responsibility report

Introduction

Our corporate responsibility strategy

I am pleased to introduce the fourth annual corporate 
responsibility report of the social and environmental 
committee (SEC) which I chair. Rathbones is committed 
to acting as a good corporate citizen and takes its 
responsibilities as investment manager, employer and 
purchaser seriously.

The SEC is responsible for ensuring that Rathbones 
effectively manages its sustainability issues. It is formed 
by members of staff from key functions such as facilities 
management, personnel, marketing, IT and investment 
management. It meets on a quarterly basis and reports 
directly to the group executive committee of the Board.

With regard to environmental, social and governance matters 
as they affect our business, the Board believes that the SEC 
has identified and assessed the significant risks to the Group’s 
short and long term value.

Whilst our total carbon footprint has risen by 2.5%, 
primarily due to the growth of the business, our carbon 
intensity per employee has fallen by 4.7%.

In November 2011, the Company offset 2,500 tonnes  
CO2e in partnership with ClimateCare. We will, however, 
continue to strive to reduce our environmental impact 
wherever possible.

Finally, we were awarded the 2011 PricewaterhouseCoopers 
Building Public Trust Award for Best People Reporting in 
a FTSE 250 company. The Company remains a constituent 
company of the FTSE4Good Index.

Andy Pomfret 
Chief Executive

Chairman of the SEC

Building Public Trust 
Awards 2011

Rathbones won the People Reporting 
in the FTSE 250 Award at PwC’s 
Building Public Trust Awards 2011 for 
its 2010 annual report and accounts.

Richard Loader (right) accepted the 
award on Rathbones’ behalf.

Rathbones’ corporate responsibility strategy can be 
summarised as follows.

Environment

Actively manage our environmental impact, reduce our 
carbon footprint by the efficient use of resources and offset 
unavoidable emissions.

Clients and investments

Maintain and develop the relationships we have with our 
clients, treat them fairly and continue to meet their needs. 
Consider corporate responsibility and governance issues in 
the companies in which we invest on behalf of our clients.

Employees 

Manage the health, well-being and development of our employees.

Communities

Engage in the communities in which we operate.

Environment

As a responsible business, Rathbones believes that 
environmental concerns are central to the day to day running 
of our business, and all due care and consideration should  
be given to reducing our impact on the environment.

Our direct environmental impacts are those typical of an 
office-based business, for example, energy consumption of 
buildings, travel-related emissions, resource consumption 
and waste generation.

As such, Rathbones considers itself to be at limited risk from 
any change in regulation or Government policy on issues 
such as climate change as they might relate to restrictions  
on emissions of major greenhouse gases. The Company is not 
a large emitter of such gases, nor does it consider itself to be 
an excessive consumer of resources. Unless future regulations 
impose restrictions on universal business environmental 
issues such as resource use, building procurement and 
business travel, then we do not consider that there would be 
any significant impact on our business.

The need to comply with any future tightening of energy 
efficiency standards would be of greater impact. However, 
Rathbones considers that the steps we have already taken in 
the course of fitting out our Liverpool and London offices 
have largely addressed any reasonable measures we could be 
expected to take.

28 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

Corporate responsibility report continued

Environment continued

Our environmental performance

Scope
Our reporting period covers the year to 30 September 
2011, with comparative figures from our previous reporting 
period 2009/10 and baseline year 2007/08. We continue to 
report emissions associated with all Rathbones’ offices, thus 
covering 100% of our workforce.

In setting our organisational boundary, we continue to use 
the financial control approach and have calculated our total 
direct Scope 1, 2 and major Scope 3 emissions. Scope 1 
consists of all direct operational emissions mainly from fuels 
combusted at Rathbones’ sites (natural gas for heating) and 
our company cars, Scope 2 covers purchased electricity, and 
Scope 3 consists of significant indirect operational emissions, 
primarily from business travel. Data collection procedures 
and calculations are in accordance with the requirements of 
the following standards: the World Resources Institute (WRI) 
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol (revised version); Defra 
Guidance on How to Report GHG Emissions (September 
2009) and ISO 14064 – part 1.

Base year
Our base year is 2007/08, the year in which verifiable 
emissions data became available for the first time. It should 
be highlighted that, during this year’s reporting, base 
year emissions have had 2010 carbon emission factors 
applied and now remain fixed for the purposes of ongoing 
calculation. 2008/09, 2009/10 and 2010/11 calculations 
use 2011 carbon emission factors. This process aligns with 
Defra’s guidance on the incorporation of updated emission 
factors into previous carbon accounting, which ensures 
accuracy and comparability in carbon accounting.

There have been no significant changes to the Company 
structure during the 2010/11 reporting period. An error  
was discovered in our Liverpool office meter readings, 
which has caused us to overstate our electricity consumption 
by approximately 45,000kWh for the past two years, 
amounting to a 2% variance in our total carbon footprint 
for 2009/10 and 2008/09. We have recalculated the last  
two years of electricity emissions to account for this material 
change to our reported data. This has not affected our  
base year.

Our carbon footprint
This year our total carbon footprint is 2,395 tonnes of 
CO2e1 (2009/10: 2,3362 tonnes of CO2e). Our emissions 
have risen by 2.5% over the last 12 months, primarily due 
to a rise in gas consumption through a particularly cold 
winter and increased electricity consumption correlating 
with increased business activity. Overall, however, we have 
managed to reduce our carbon footprint per employee to 
3.23 tonnes of CO2e per person (2007/08: 3.69 tonnes of 
CO2e). This represents a reduction of 12% in our emissions 
intensity in comparison to our base year.

Chart 1. Tonnes of CO2e by emissions source for 2010/11

  Gas 
  Company cars 
  Electricity 
  Flights 
  National rail 
  Taxis 
  Non-company cars 
  Data centre electricity 

280
1
1,642
187
94
6
134
51

Total 

2,395 tCO2e

1  We have expressed our carbon footprint in terms of CO2 equivalent (CO2e) to 

accommodate non-CO2 greenhouse gas emissions

2  Our 2009/10 reported carbon footprint has fallen by 4% from last year’s 
reported total for two notable reasons: 1) use of 2011 carbon emissions 
factors which result in a reduction of 1% overall carbon emissions compared to 
2010 carbon emission factors; and 2) electricity  consumption of approximately 
45,000kWh has been removed from Liverpool’s submitted 2010 data due to 
identification of an error in meter readings from the last reporting year

3  Including 51 tonnes CO2e indirect emissions from the outsourced data centre  

during the 2010/11 reporting year

Table 1. Absolute and relative CO2e from Rathbones’ offices under scope

Office floor space (m2)
Number of employees as at 31 December

Scope 1 (Gas and company cars)
Scope 2 (Electricity)
Scope 3 (Business travel)3

Total CO2e (tonnes)

2010/11

12,385
741

280
1,642
473

2,395

2009/10 
)
(Previous year

11,454
689

258
1,656
422

2,336

2007/08 
 )
(Base year

11,489
673

310
1,691
481

2,482

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

29

 
 
 
 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Environment continued

Intensity measurement 
In line with the Accounting for Sustainability model, we are 
reporting our carbon intensity against our operating income  
and funds under management.

Table 2. Carbon intensity

Full time equivalent employees (FTEE)

Operating income (£m)
Funds under management (£m)

2010/11

2009/10

741

689

2011

2010

144.5
15,850

127.2
15,630

2007/08

673

2008

131.8
10,460

Carbon intensity1

2010/11 

2009/10 

2007/08 

3.23

3.39

3.69

Carbon intensity1

2011

16.57
0.15

2010

18.36
0.15

2008

18.83
0.24

1  Tonnes CO2e per FTEE, £m of operating income or funds under management

During the reporting year 2010/11 core IT and 
communications facilities in our London office have been 
outsourced to a data centre. As per the World Resources 
Institute (WRI) Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol (revised 
version), electricity consumed by the data centre since the 
relocation has been included under Scope 3 emissions.  
This has contributed to the fall in Scope 2 emissions and 
increase in Scope 3 emissions.

Relocation to data centre

In April 2011 Rathbones migrated  
all of its London-based internal servers 
to a data centre. This move both  
significantly simplified the IT  
complexity and risk of the London  
office move as well as allowing for  
IT systems expansion in the future.

We have been calculating the greenhouse gas emissions from 
our business activities for the past four years and continue to 
reduce our carbon intensity as much as practically possible.
This year we have also taken responsibility for our remaining, 
unavoidable business emissions, by offsetting 2,500 tonnes 
CO2e through high-quality emission reduction ClimateCare 
projects in Kenya, India and Brazil. We chose the projects not 
only for their robust emissions reductions but also because 
each one contributes towards the sustainable development 
of the local communities: improving incomes, health and 
education opportunities. The specific projects we have  
invested in are certified under VCS and GS VER Standards4.

4  The three CilmateCare projects are the Lifestraw clean water provision 
  project in Kenya, the Saldanha small scale hydro project in Brazil and treadle 

water pumps project in India. Details are available via the ClimateCare website  
(www.climatecare.org)

Performance analysis

Energy
Electricity	
Total direct electricity consumption and associated CO2e 
emissions fell by 1% compared to 2009/10, whilst indirect 
electricity emissions increased by 100% (due to outsourcing 
key London IT functions to a data centre). Together, total 
direct and indirect electricity CO2e emissions have increased 
by 2% compared to the previous reporting year. Whilst 
managing the data centre off-site with a specialist provider 
has improved the energy efficiency of a major component 
of our IT infrastructure, the overall increase in electricity 
consumption is due to the growth of the business. 

Natural	gas	
Natural gas usage has increased by 14% over the past  
12 months, primarily due to the cold 2010/11 winter.

Objectives	for	2012	
We will continue to improve our data collection processes 
so that offices which currently use benchmark data can be 
individually monitored and will seek to implement further 
energy efficiency measures where possible. 

Business travel
There has been no significant change in the CO2e emissions 
associated with business travel during 2010/11 and business 
travel emissions remain steady at 12% below baseline  
year levels.

By successfully implementing a travel policy in Liverpool 
we have restricted domestic flights from this office to Jersey, 
Aberdeen and Exeter. Additionally, during 2010/11 there 
have been significantly fewer flights taken to Edinburgh.  
The acquisition of a business from Lloyds Banking  
Group plc in 2009 led to a significant short term increase 
in 2009/10. Overall we have witnessed a reduction in flight 
emissions by 19 tonnes of CO2e. However, this reduction is 
counter-balanced by increased emissions from non-company 
car and taxi travel. National rail travel has remained 
unchanged during 2010/11.

Objectives	for	2012	
We shall extend the availability of video conferencing 
facilities and encourage its use wherever practical.

30 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Environment continued

Waste and recycling
Enthusiastic participation in recycling programmes 
continues across all offices, with most offices reporting 
recycling figures for shredded confidential paper and other 
dry recyclables streams such as other office paper, glass and 
plastic bottles.

There has been a 22% reduction in total reported waste 
across the business this year. This is almost wholly due 
to a decrease of approximately 55,000kg in confidential 
shredding from the Liverpool office after the completion  
of a significant filing review earlier in the reporting year.

The quality of data regarding the waste produced from  
our offices has deteriorated over the past year. Changes  
in waste suppliers, office services and locations has made  
it difficult to collect consistent data on our waste and 
recycling volumes. Estimated recycling levels were 89%, 
down from an estimated 93% last year, partly as a  
result of poorer data quality affecting the accuracy of  
the calculations. 

Objectives	for	2012
We will aim to reduce our total waste generation through 
proactive staff engagement and will seek to improve the 
quality of waste data we receive.

Table 3. Waste and recycling data

Paper and cardboard
Secure shredding
Other materials

Total recycling
Waste to energy
Residual landfill waste

Total waste

Per employee (kg)

Mass collected 
2010/11 
(tonnes)

66
58
9

133
30
21

184

248

% of total

36%
31%
5%

72%
17%
11%

100%

Mass collected 
2009/10 
(tonnes)

72 
106 
9 

187 
34 
16 

237

344

% of total

30%
45%
4%

79%
14%
7%

100%

Paper usage 
Over the last 12 months total paper consumption has risen 
by 3% to 132 tonnes, although the amount consumed per 
employee has dropped by 4%. Given that paper manufacture 

from virgin materials is both energy intensive and of high 
environmental impact we are committed to reducing our 
consumption and ensuring that, where possible, paper is 
made from 100% recycled pulp.

Table 4. Paper usage

Paper weight (tonnes)

Recycled paper
Virgin paper

Total paper

Recycled percentage

Total paper usage per employee (kg)

In total, 66% of the paper we consumed was from  
recycled stock. The majority of the stationery paper 
purchased is Evolve brand, a product made from 100%  
UK post-consumer waste. During this reporting year,  
we reduced stationery paper consumption by nearly  
80,000 sheets despite the increased number of employees.  
We continue to purchase higher levels of printed material, 
in line with 2009/10 figures, due to the success of the 
investment management business.

Total 
2010/11

Total 
2009/10 
(Previous year)

Total 
2007/08 
(Base year
)

87
45

132

66%

178

88
40

128

69%

186

84
24

108

78%

160

Objectives	for	2012	
We will reinforce our policy to print on recycled paper 
wherever possible, in order to increase the percentage  
of recycled materials purchased back to the level of our  
baseline year.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

31

 
 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Environment continued

Table 5. Performance versus our objectives

Our objective for 2011 

Performance 

Comment 

Our objective for 2012

Energy 
Investigate environmental  
benefits of outsourcing  
the London IT and  
communications facilities. 

Achieved 

Travel 
Introduce video conferencing  
facilities to all offices. 

On track 

Increase internal data quality  
rating to 4 by 2011 (see data  
quality rating in table 6). 

Achieved 

Waste 
Seek ways of reducing waste   On track 
in offices other than Liverpool  
and London.

Paper usage 
Consider resource efficient  
options for delivering  
our client communications,  
including electronic media. 

On track 

The London IT and  
communications facilities  
were outsourced to a data 
centre in April 2011, allowing 
our IT equipment to operate 
more efficiently.

Ensure our new London  
office is more energy  
efficient than the old office,  
to be measured by comparing  
energy consumption per  
square metre. 

The central management 
infrastructure is now in place 
and video conferencing  
equipment will be installed in  
all offices in 2012.

Consistent business travel 
reports from a centralised  
travel agent have ensured 
that our data quality rating 
has attained a rating of 4.

Encourage the increased  
use of video conferencing  
and reduce the number  
of domestic flights.

Clarify expenses procedures 
to ensure journey details are 
provided for all flights and  
rail journeys.

Bristol, Cambridge and 
Winchester have all reduced 
their total waste volumes. 

Improve our waste data 
quality rating to 3 in 2012. 

Approximately 1,000  
clients have opted to receive 
their portfolio information  
electronically.

Increase client take-up  
by greater promotion and the  
introduction of a client web 
portal towards the end  
of 2012.

32 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Carbon Smart opinion statement

Completeness

Carbon Smart’s statement provides Rathbones and its 
stakeholders with a third party assessment of the quality 
and reliability of Rathbones’ carbon footprint data for the 
reporting period 1 October 2010 to 30 September 2011.  
It does not represent an independent third party assurance  
of Rathbones’ management approach to sustainability.

Reported environmental data covers all employees and  
all entities that meet the criteria of being subject to control 
or significant influence of the reporting organisation.  
We recommend that Rathbones continues to improve  
its data collection processes, particularly in the area of  
waste management.

Carbon Smart has been commissioned by Rathbone Brothers 
Plc for the fourth consecutive year to calculate Rathbones’ 
carbon footprint for all offices for its 2011 corporate 
responsibility report. Through this engagement Carbon 
Smart has assured Rathbones that the reported carbon 
footprint is representative of the business and that the 
data presented is credible and compliant with appropriate 
standards and industry practices. Data has been collected 
and calculated following the ISO 14064 – part 1 standard 
and verified against the WRI GHG Protocol principles  
of completeness, consistency and accuracy.

Carbon Smart’s work has included interviews with key 
Rathbones personnel, a review of internal and external 
documentation, interrogation of source data and data 
collection systems including comparison with, and 
appropriate recalculation of, the previous years’ data. 
Carbon Smart have concluded the following:

Relevance

We have ensured the GHG inventory appropriately  
reflects the GHG emissions of the Company and serves the 
decision making needs of users, both internal and external  
to the Company.

Consistency

In order to ensure comparability, we have used the same 
calculation methodologies and assumptions as previous  
years and changed the emission factors used for the newest 
appropriate releases.

Transparency

Where relevant, we have included appropriate references to 
the accounting and calculation methodologies, assumptions 
and re-calculations performed.

Accuracy

To our knowledge, data is considered accurate within the 
limits of the quality and completeness of the data provided.

Carbon Smart has assessed the data quality against the WRI 
GHG Protocol principles. Data from each emission source 
has been rated 1 (poorest) to 5 (best). For this year, overall 
data quality has been rated 3.6 which reflects consistent data 
quality compared to 2009/10, although this accommodates 
an improvement in Scope 1 data (the Chichester office now 
has natural gas meter readings available to reduce the use of 
Government benchmarks to only two sites in the estate) and  
a deterioration in waste and recycling data quality.

Table 6. Data quality rating

Scope

Overall
Scope 1
Scope 2
Scope 3
Paper
Waste and recycling

Ben Murray  
Director  

Louise Quarrell 
Director

Carbon Smart Limited  

Carbon Smart Limited

20 February 2012

% Carbon 
footprint 
2010/11

Data 
quality rating 
2010/11

Data 
quality rating 
2009/10

Data 
quality rating 
2007/08

100%
12%
68%
20%
–
–

3.6
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.0

3.6 
3.0 
4.0 
4.0
4.0
3.0

2.6
2.0
3.0
2.0
4.0
2.0

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

33

 
 
 
 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Clients and investments

Voting

Responsible investment

Although general investment activities are not covered  
by a formal responsible investment policy, social, 
environmental and ethical (SEE) considerations are taken 
into account for specific mandates throughout the Group, 
but particularly by our specialist ethical investment service, 
Rathbone Greenbank Investments. As at 31 December  
2011, Rathbone Greenbank Investments had £0.45 billion 
of funds under management, representing some 3.0% of the 
total funds managed by Rathbone Investment Management.

Greenbank Investor Day

Rathbone Greenbank Investments  
hosted its 14th annual Investor Day  
in May 2011. Held at the Earth Trust 
Centre, some 70 delegates attended 
and heard from three selected 
speakers on this year’s theme: 
‘Sustainable consumption – a 
contradiction in terms?’.

Media coverage and consumer awareness of SEE issues 
(especially climate change) continue to raise the profile of 
ethical or socially responsible investing. However, while 
coverage of socially responsible investment products (such 
as unit or investment trusts), ethical banking and ethical 
mortgages tends to be quite widespread, less attention is 
given to the opportunities for private investors to invest 
directly in companies addressing social and environmental 
challenges through bespoke portfolio management.

Through Rathbone Greenbank Investments and Rathbone  
Unit Trust Management’s Ethical Bond Fund, the Company  
is able to provide investment services tailored to clients’ 
interests in these areas. Where appropriate, the Company  
is also able to participate in new share issues offered by 
companies that provide environmentally or socially  
beneficial products or services.

Affiliations

Rathbone Brothers Plc has been a signatory to the Carbon 
Disclosure Project since 2006 and became a signatory to 
the UN Principles for Responsible Investment in September 
2009. In addition, Rathbone Greenbank Investments is a 
long-standing member of influential groups such as the UK 
Sustainable and Investment Finance association (UKSIF) 
and the Ecumenical Council for Corporate Responsibility 
(ECCR), as well as being a founding endorser of the Forest 
Footprint Disclosure Project.

During 2011 the Group employed a proxy voting consultant 
and introduced a revised policy on governance and proxy 
voting. Rathbone Unit Trust Management, as an institutional 
investor, meets its obligations as a signatory to the 
Stewardship Code, while Rathbone Investment Management 
now exercises the voting rights attached to approximately 
90% of the UK equity it holds on behalf of its clients. Voting 
is also undertaken on any company if requested by an 
underlying shareholder.

Engagement

Engagement with companies on environmental, social or 
governance (ESG) matters is largely undertaken by Rathbone 
Greenbank Investments’ ethical research team. This ranges 
from low level contact with companies on issues relating to 
ESG disclosure to participation in co-filing and voting on 
shareholder resolutions at company AGMs. These activities 
may occur as a result of fundamental analysis of companies’ 
ESG data, or it may come about because of collaborative 
efforts initiated by interest groups such as UKSIF or the PRI 
Engagement Clearinghouse.

Employees

As with all professional services firms, Rathbones’ greatest 
asset is its people. Their health, well-being, development, 
remuneration and involvement are all vital to the continuing 
success of the business.

Health and welfare

Rathbones is committed to providing a safe and healthy 
environment in which its employees can work. With the help 
of external consultants our health and safety policy for the 
UK offices is regularly updated to reflect current legislation 
and best practice. We provide a range of training courses 
for those staff with health and safety responsibilities and a 
steering group comprising representatives from all our offices 
meets twice a year to share knowledge and to ensure that 
health and safety standards are maintained. It is chaired by 
Ian Buckley.

Upon completion of a qualifying period, all UK employees 
(and their direct family members) are eligible for private 
medical cover paid for by the Company. All UK staff have 
the opportunity to attend an annual medical examination 
and Rathbones also provides an independent and 
confidential employee assistance programme offering  
advice on employment, personal and legal concerns.

Equality and diversity

Rathbones is an equal opportunities employer and it is  
our policy to ensure that all job applicants and employees 
are treated fairly and on merit regardless of their race, 
gender, marital status, age, disability, religious belief or 
sexual orientation.

34 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Health and welfare continued

Learning and development

It is our policy and practice to give full and fair 
consideration to applications for employment by disabled 
people. If employees become disabled during their service 
with Rathbones, wherever practicable, arrangements and 
adjustments are made to continue their employment and 
training. Should this not be possible we provide support 
in the form of a permanent health insurance scheme which 
pays a monthly income in lieu of salary and pays pension 
contributions on behalf of the employer and employee.

Work-life balance

Rathbones recognises the importance of an appropriate 
work-life balance both to the health and welfare of 
employees and to the business. Holiday entitlements are  
25 days increasing to 30 days after five years’ service.
Employees are able to buy up to five additional days of  
leave with the agreement of their manager. We also provide 
time off for dependants, parental leave and paternity leave  
and have a childcare voucher scheme in place. A scheme  
offering savings, discounts and promotions to staff was 
launched in 2011 under the ‘Rathbonus’ banner.

Maternity benefits remain in excess of those required under 
statutory provisions. Career breaks of up to two years 
are also available for those with childcare responsibilities. 
Flexible working policies are offered with a high number 
of successful applications, particularly from parents with  
young children. On completion of five years’ service, 
employees have the opportunity to take up to three months’ 
unpaid leave once in every ten years without any loss  
of service-related benefits such as pension or death in  
service cover.

The uptake and effectiveness of these policies is monitored 
together with other indicators of staff satisfaction levels such 
as average annual sickness rates and staff turnover.

Code of conduct

FSA registered staff are required to adhere to FSA rules and 
to the Rathbones compliance manual. The manual includes 
the Rathbone code of business conduct and a number of 
policy documents including policies on dealing, gifts and 
business benefits and bribery and conflicts of interest.

Financial awareness event

In July, students aged between  
16 and 18 were invited to join our 
investment managers at a financial 
awareness event held at our London 
office. The aim was to shed light on 
the sometimes confusing world of 
money and investments. Over the  
next seven months, the students will 
compete in a Rathbones financial 
awareness league, using an online 
trading platform to simulate investing. 
Interest in the 2012 event can be  
registered on our website at:

www.rathbones.com/financial-
awareness-2012-london.

Learning and development continues to be an important 
focus for the business to ensure its continued success. 
The maintenance of a high level of investment in training 
demonstrates our view that the development of our people 
is a continuing long term aim that becomes ever more 
important in turbulent times. During 2011, Rathbones 
invested £451,000 in developing its people (2010: 
£393,000). This equates to an average of £589 per employee 
(2010: £562) and 2.2 days per employee (2010: 2.2 days)

Retail Distribution Review (RDR) 
One of the aims of the RDR is to raise professional  
standards across the industry and we are supportive of this 
principle. A significant programme of training has been 
implemented to ensure that all investment managers comply 
with the requirements of the RDR. As the 31 December 
2012 deadline approaches, 88% of our investment managers 
now hold appropriate qualifications with the remainder 
working towards examinations in the coming months.

Investment management training 
As part of our ongoing objective to maintain high  
standards of professional knowledge and skills a course 
focusing on the effective investment management of Self 
Invested Personal Pensions (SIPP) was run during the year. 
All investment managers have been attending a range  
of courses designed to top up knowledge on subjects 
including regulation and risk.

IT training 
Advances in technology are key to ensuring high levels of 
service to our clients and to our overall competitiveness and 
training to improve IT literacy is crucial. The training team 
develops courses to support users of standard applications 
and our core bespoke IT systems. Much of this training is 
delivered to small groups or on a one to one basis.

Rathbone development programme 
The fifth annual programme of its type involved delegates 
from our support functions with the aim of improving 
business awareness and increasing levels of staff engagement. 
The theme running throughout the course was a stock 
selection competition in which the participants worked in 
small teams to increase the value of a notional portfolio.  
The progress of the teams was reviewed by a number of 
investment managers. Other elements of the course included 
learning more about the managing of investments and  
clients and an analysis of our market place. The programme 
is chaired by the chief executive and attended by members  
of the executive committee. This high level of support 
provides increased profile for the attendees and a link into 
the grass roots of the business for senior management. 
To date almost 100 members of staff have attended these 
programmes and such is their success that a sixth course  
will take place in 2012.

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011  

35

 
Corporate responsibility report continued

Learning and development continued

Introduction to management 
This 18 month programme concluded during the year with 
all 18 delegates completing the Chartered Management 
Institute’s introductory diploma award. The course started 
and concluded with a 360° feedback process on which 
individual development plans were based and subsequently 
measured. All participants achieved significant improvements 
against the management competencies. To maintain 
momentum from the programme a series of ongoing alumni 
networking events has been established.

Secretarial networking and training programme 
This initiative continues with regular business updates to 
ensure that this important group of staff are fully aware of 
changes within the Company that will affect their role and 
the requirements to support investment managers. During 
the year ‘lunch and learn’ sessions were introduced to 
encourage further skills development.

In addition to formal training there are numerous initiatives 
to encourage on the job training and sharing of knowledge 
through cross-functional presentations.

Underpinning learning and development is a planning 
structure that takes a top down strategic approach working 
with a committee of representatives from across the Group. 
In addition to this there is a performance appraisal process 
incorporating personal development plans.

Communities

Donations and fundraising

During the year, the Group made total charitable  
donations of £196,000, representing 0.50% of Group  
pre-tax profits (2010: £162,000, representing 0.54%  
of Group pre-tax profits).

Employees are encouraged to donate to charity in a tax 
efficient manner through the Give As You Earn (GAYE) 
payroll giving scheme. In 2011, Rathbone employees made 
payments totalling £189,000 (2010: £107,000) through 
this scheme, which is administered by the Charities Aid 
Foundation. The Company matched staff donations of up  
to £200 per month made through GAYE and in 2011 
donated £108,000 (2010: £85,000) to causes chosen by 
employees through this method.

In 2010, Children with Cancer UK and The Anthony Nolan 
Trust were selected by an employee ballot as the charities we 
would support for 2010 and 2011. During 2011, £17,000 
has been raised by employees for these two charities. For 
2012 and 2013, employees voted to support the Claire 
House Children’s Hospice and The Oliver King Foundation.

During the year, Rathbone employees have undertaken 
a wide variety of community and fundraising events.

Company charities

Rathbones supports two charities 
over a two year period. Rathbones 
and its staff raised £17,000 in 2011 
for The Anthony Nolan Trust and 
Children with Cancer UK. Nominated 
and voted for by staff, the charities 
selected for the 2012/13 period 
were Claire House Children’s Hospice 
and The Oliver King Foundation. 

36 

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Governance

38	
41	
45	
49	
59	
61	
62	

Directors
Directors’	report
Corporate	governance	report
Remuneration	report
Audit	Committee	report
Nomination	Committee	report
Statement	of	directors’	responsibilities	in	respect	of	the	
report	and	accounts

Rathbone Brothers Plc Report	and	accounts	2011  

37

 
Directors

Chairman 

Mark	Nicholls

Title: Chairman
Appointment: 1 December 2010
Age: 62
Board committees: Re N

Mark Nicholls is a lawyer and corporate financier. After 
studying law at Cambridge he took articles at Linklaters 
before joining S G Warburg in 1976. He became a director  
in 1984 and head of investment banking in 1994. In 1996  
he joined Royal Bank of Scotland and became head of their 
private equity group, leaving in 2003 to pursue a plural 
career. He is currently chairman of the West Bromwich 
Building Society and a non-executive director of Northern 
Investors Company PLC. He became chairman following the 
AGM on 11 May 2011 and is considered to be independent.

Executive directors 

Andy	Pomfret

Title: Chief Executive
Appointment: 1 August 1999
Age: 51
Board committees: E N Ri

Andy Pomfret qualified as a chartered accountant  
with Peat, Marwick, Mitchell & Co. (now KPMG). Prior  
to joining Rathbones in July 1999, he spent over 13 years 
with Kleinwort Benson as a corporate financier, venture 
capitalist and latterly finance director of the investment 
management and private banking division. He became  
chief executive in October 2004. He is also a non-executive 
director of Graphite Enterprise Trust plc and a director  
of the Association of Private Client Investment Managers & 
Stockbrokers (APCIMS). He chairs the Group’s social and 
environmental committee.

Ian	Buckley

Title: Head of the Trust, Tax and
Pension Advisory Businesses
Appointment: 21 December 2001
Age: 61
Board committees: E Ri

Ian Buckley qualified as a chartered accountant with  
Peat, Marwick, Mitchell & Co. (now KPMG) in 1975.  
He was chief executive of Smith & Williamson for ten years 
from 1985 to 1995 and subsequently chief executive of  
EFG Private Bank Limited and Tenon Group Plc. He is  
the director responsible for risk management and marketing 
and is also chairman of the Group’s IT steering committee. 
He is also a committee member of Family Assurance  
Friendly Society.

Paul	Chavasse

Title: Chief Operating Officer
Appointment: 26 September 2001
Age: 47
Board committees: E Ri

Paul Chavasse started his career working for the  
institutional fund management arm of NatWest, which was 
later merged with Gartmore. After a period in the private 
client businesses of NatWest and Coutts, his final role before 
joining the Group in 2001 was as head of NatWest Portfolio 
Management in Bristol. He is currently the chief operating 
officer responsible for the Group’s investment operations,  
IT infrastructure and facilities. He will become head of 
investment management on 1 March 2012 when Richard 
Lanyon steps down from this role.

Richard	Lanyon

Title: Head of Investment Management
Appointment: 20 March 1996
Age: 60
Board committees: E Ri

Richard Lanyon started his City career with Laurence  
Prust, moving to Framlington Group Plc in 1986 where he 
was the director responsible for pension funds. He joined  
the Group in 1992 to concentrate on private client 
discretionary investment management. He will hand  
over his responsibilities as head of investment management  
to Paul Chavasse on 1 March 2012 and will retire from  
the Board at the AGM on 10 May 2012. He will remain  
with Rathbones as an investment director, managing his 
clients’ portfolios.

38	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors	continued

Andrew	Morris

Title: Head of Investment Management
– Liverpool and other Northern Offices
Appointment: 1 November 2000
Age: 47
Board committees: None

Andrew Morris has spent his entire working career at 
Rathbones in private client investment management. He is 
chairman of the Group’s business continuity and training  
and competence committees and manages a large number  
of client portfolios.

Richard	Smeeton

Title: Head of Investment Management
– London and Jersey
Appointment: 1 November 2000
Age: 47
Board committees: None

Richard Smeeton trained with County Bank and joined 
Laurence Keen in 1988 prior to its acquisition by Rathbones 
in 1995. He sits on a number of the Group’s management 
and investment committees and also manages a large number 
of client portfolios.

Paul	Stockton

Title: Finance Director
Appointment: 24 September 2008
Age: 46
Board committees: E Ri

Paul Stockton qualified as a chartered accountant with 
PricewaterhouseCoopers in 1992. In 1999 he joined  
Old Mutual Plc as group financial controller, becoming 
director of finance in 2001 and finance director of  
Gerrard Limited eight months later. Following the sale of 
Gerrard to Barclays in 2003, he left in 2005 and has since 
worked for Euroclear in Brussels and as a division finance 
director of the Pearl Group. He joined Rathbones in  
August 2008 and is also a non-executive director of the 
Financial Services Compensation Scheme.

Board committees
The principal Board committees are 
the executive, audit, remuneration, 
nomination and risk management 
committees. The Board has delegated 
full authority to the executive 
committee, subject to a list of matters 
which are reserved for decision by  
the full Board. The other Board 
committees have formal terms of 
reference, which are reviewed and 
approved by the Board on an annual 
basis. These are available on request 
from the Company’s registered office 
and on the Company website.

E  Executive Committee
The purpose of the executive 
committee is to monitor every  
aspect of the Group businesses  
on a continuing basis and to analyse 
and plan all business proposals  
in detail for submission to and 
consideration by the Board. The 
executive committee meets monthly 
and more frequently when required.

Current members
•  Andy Pomfret (chairman)
•  Ian Buckley
•  Paul Chavasse
•  Richard Lanyon
•  Paul Stockton

A  Audit Committee
Details of its work are set out in the 
audit committee report on page 59.

Current members
•  Oliver Corbett (chairman)
•  Kate Avery
•  Caroline Burton
•  David Harrel
•  Kathryn Matthews

Re  Remuneration Committee
Full details of its role are set out in the 
remuneration report on page 49.

Current members
•   Caroline Burton (chairman)
•   Kate Avery
•  Oliver Corbett
•  David Harrel
•  Kathryn Matthews
•  Mark Nicholls

N  Nomination Committee
Full details of its role are set out in  
the nomination committee report on 
page 61.

Current members 
•  Mark Nicholls (chairman) 
•  Kate Avery 
•  Caroline Burton 
•  Oliver Corbett 
•  David Harrel 
•  Kathryn Matthews 
•  Andy Pomfret

Ri  Risk Management Committee
Full details of its role are set out in the 
risk management report on page 23.

Current director members
•  Ian Buckley (chairman)*
•  Paul Chavasse
•  Oliver Corbett
•  Richard Lanyon
•  Kathryn Matthews*
•  Andy Pomfret
•  Paul Stockton

*  Kathryn Matthews will become 
chairman of the committee on  
1 March 2012

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

39

	
 
 
 
Directors	continued

Non-executive directors

David	Harrel

Title: Senior Independent Director
Appointment: 1 December 2007
Age: 63
Board committees: A Re N

Caroline	Burton

Title: Non-Executive Director
(Independent)
Appointment: 1 November 2003
Age: 62
Board committees: A Re N 

David Harrel was one of the founding partners of  
S J Berwin LLP in 1982, and was made senior partner 
in 1992. He relinquished this role in 2006 and is now 
a consultant to the firm. David has a variety of other 
appointments. He is non-executive chairman of  
Savile Group Plc and CPA Global Limited, a member  
of the board of the English National Opera and a trustee  
of the Clore Duffield Foundation.

Caroline Burton is a highly experienced figure within 
the asset management industry. She spent 26 years with 
Guardian Royal Exchange Plc, where she was executive 
director in charge of investments from 1990 until 1999.  
She was also a director of The Scottish Metropolitan 
Property Plc until June 2000 and was a member of the 
service authority for the National Crime Squad and National 
Criminal Intelligence Service until March 2006. She is a  
non-executive director of TR Property Investment Trust Plc, 
LV Friendly Society and BlackRock Smaller Companies  
Trust plc. She is chairman of the remuneration committee.

Kate	Avery

Title: Non-Executive Director
(Independent)
Appointment: 6 January 2010
Age: 52
Board committees: A Re N

Oliver	Corbett

Title: Non-Executive Director 
(Independent)
Appointment: 7 March 2006
Age: 47
Board committees: A Re Ri N

Kate Avery began her career with Barclays Plc, where she 
worked for some eighteen years, becoming managing director 
of Barclays Bank Trust Company and Barclays Stockbrokers. 
She subsequently joined Legal and General Group Plc and 
served on its main board for eight years until January 2009, 
latterly as group executive director for wealth management. 
She also served as a non-executive director with Kelda Group 
plc until its sale to an infrastructure fund in 2008. She is 
currently chairman of Openwork Holdings Limited and is a 
non-executive director of the Newcastle Building Society.

Oliver Corbett is group finance director of Novae Group plc. 
He is a chartered accountant and worked for S G Warburg, 
Phoenix Securities (later Donaldson Lufkin Jenrette) and 
Dresdner Kleinwort Wasserstein, where he was managing 
director of investment banking, before joining Novae Group  
in October 2003. He is chairman of the audit committee.

Kathryn	Matthews

Title: Non-Executive Director 
(Independent)
Appointment: 6 January 2010
Age: 52
Board committees: A Re Ri N

Kathryn Matthews has spent her entire career in investment 
management, most recently as chief investment officer, Asia 
Pacific (ex Japan) for Fidelity International. Prior to that, she 
held senior appointments with William M Mercer, AXA 
Investment Managers, Santander Global Advisers and Baring 
Asset Management. She is a non-executive director of a 
number of companies including Hermes Fund Managers 
Limited, Aperam S.A. Fidelity Asian Values Plc, Montanaro 
UK Smaller Companies Investment Trust Plc and J P Morgan 
Chinese Investment Trust Plc. She is to chair the risk 
management committee with effect from 1 March 2012.

40	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ report

The information contained in the chairman’s statement, chief executive’s statement, Rathbones at a glance, strategy and 
business performance, business review, financial review, risk management report, directors’ profiles, corporate governance 
report, audit committee report, nomination committee report, corporate responsibility report and directors’ responsibility 
statement form part of the directors’ report.

Group results and Company dividends

The Rathbone Brothers Plc group profit after taxation for the year ended 31 December 2011 was £28,706,000  
(2010: £21,552,000).

The directors recommend the payment of a final dividend of 29.0p (2010: 28.0p) on 17 May 2012 to shareholders on the 
register on 27 April 2012. An interim dividend of 17.0p (2010: 16.0p) was paid on 5 October 2011 to shareholders on the 
register on 16 September 2011. This results in total dividends of 46.0p (2010: 44.0p) per ordinary share for the year. These 
dividends amount to £20,001,000 (2010: £19,067,000) – see note 11 to the consolidated financial statements.

A full review of the Group’s business performance is set out in the business review and financial review on pages 17 to 22. 
Information about environmental, employee and social and community issues are set out in the corporate responsibility  
report on pages 28 to 36. 

Post balance sheet events

Details of events after the balance sheet date are set out in note 33 to the consolidated financial statements.

Capital structure

The Company’s share capital is comprised of one class of ordinary shares of 5p each. At 31 December 2011 43,561,140 shares 
were in issue (2010: 43,376,790). 50,000 shares were held in treasury (2010: nil). The shares carry no rights to fixed income 
and each share carries the right to one vote at general meetings. All shares are fully paid.

There are no specific restrictions on the size of a shareholding or on the transfer of shares, which are both covered by the 
provisions of the Articles of Association and prevailing legislation.

The Board currently has the authority to allot 14.3 million shares (approximately one third of the issued share capital at  
1 March 2011). The Board currently has the authority to buy back up to 2.1 million shares under certain stringent conditions.

Regarding the appointment and replacement of directors, the Company is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association, 
the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’), the Companies Act 2006 and related legislation. Amendment of the Articles 
of Association requires a special resolution of shareholders.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

41

	
Directors’	report	continued

Directors and their interests

The interests of directors and connected persons in the share capital of the Company are shown in table 1. Following  
the distribution of an estate, Richard Smeeton inherited 6,100 ordinary shares in February 2012. There were no other 
changes between 31 December 2011 and 20 February 2012. Details of directors’ share options are shown in tables 6 and 7 
on page 55.

Table	1.	Directors’	shareholdings	

Number of 5p  
ordinary shares at  
1
1 January 2011 
Beneficial

Number of 5p  
ordinary shares at  
31 December 2011 
Beneficial

Chairman
M P Nicholls

Executive
I M Buckley
P D G Chavasse
R P Lanyon
A T Morris
A D Pomfret2
R I Smeeton
R P Stockton

Non-executive
C R R Avery
C M Burton
O R P Corbett
D T D Harrel
K A Matthews

–

36,813
54,218
203,961
55,475
101,034
116,856
5,114

2,457
3,623
1,849
8
160

2,146

49,622
70,159
226,962
66,747
111,115
134,572
18,430

6,335
4,207
2,381
161
623

1  Or date of appointment if later 
2 The holding at 31 December 2011 no longer includes shares held by his adult daughter

Since 20 February 2012 (but before 1 March 2012, the last practicable date for inclusion in this report before its publication), 
the following directors have sold ordinary shares: Paul Chavasse (3,377 shares), Richard Lanyon (3,000 shares) and  
Richard Smeeton (6,500 shares).

Executive directors

The directors with executive responsibilities are Andy Pomfret, Ian Buckley, Paul Chavasse, Richard Lanyon, Andrew Morris, 
Richard Smeeton and Paul Stockton. Their biographies are on pages 38 and 39. Richard Lanyon is to retire from the Board at 
the Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2012.

Non-executive directors

The directors with non-executive responsibilities are Mark Nicholls, Kate Avery, Caroline Burton, Oliver Corbett, David 
Harrel and Kathryn Matthews. Their biographies are on pages 38 and 40.

Mark Powell retired as a director and chairman at the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting on 11 May 2011. Mark 
Nicholls became chairman from that date.

The senior independent director is David Harrel who is available to shareholders if they have concerns that they would 
rather not address to the chairman or executive directors or which remain unresolved after an approach through the normal 
channels. The Board considers that all non-executive directors are independent.

Retirement and re-appointment of directors

In accordance with provision B.7.1 of the Code, all directors will seek re-election at the Annual General Meeting on  
10 May 2012. 

42	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Directors’	report	continued

Substantial shareholdings

At 20 February 2012, the Company had received notifications in accordance with the Financial Services Authority’s Disclosure 
and Transparency Rule 5.1.2 of the following interests of 3% or more in the voting rights of the Company.

Table	2.	Substantial	shareholdings	at	20	February	2012

Shareholder

BlackRock Inc.
Lindsell Train Ltd.
Massachusetts Financial Services Company
Legal & General Group Plc

Date of  
notification

Number of 
voting rights

17 March 2011
30 January 2012
19 May 2011
23 January 2009

6,939,501
4,363,462
2,254,063
1,700,574

% of voting 
rights

15.99%
10.03%
5.19%
3.96%

There were no changes between the date of this report and 1 March 2012.

Political and charitable donations

No contributions were made for political purposes during the year (2010: nil). Details of the Company’s charitable donations 
can be found in the corporate responsibility report on page 36.

Employees

Details of the Company’s employment practices, its policy regarding the employment of disabled persons and its employee 
involvement practices can be found in the corporate responsibility report on pages 34 to 36.

The Company encourages the involvement of its employees in its performance through both a Share Incentive Plan launched  
in 2001 and a Save As You Earn scheme launched in 2009.

Policy on the payment of creditors

Rathbones does not follow a published code or standard on payment practice. Its policy is to fix terms of payment with each 
supplier in accordance with its requirements and financial procedures. Rathbones ensures that suppliers are aware of those  
terms and abides by them subject to the resolution of any disagreement regarding the supply. In the majority of cases, the  
terms agreed with suppliers are for payment within 30 days of their invoice date. Trade creditors of the UK subsidiaries at  
31 December 2011 represented 36 days of annual purchases (2010: 14 days). The increase was primarily due to the receipt  
of invoices of £2.4 million relating to capital expenditure on the new London office incurred towards the year end. The 
Company itself has no trade creditors.

Financial instruments and risk management

The risk management objectives and policies of the Group are set out in note 28 to the consolidated financial statements.

Indemnification of directors

The Company has granted indemnities, which are uncapped, to all directors and to the company secretary by way of deed. 
Qualifying third party indemnity provisions as defined by Section 234 of the Companies Act 2006 were therefore in  
place throughout 2011 and remain in force at the date of this report.

Share price

The mid-market price of the Company’s shares at 31 December 2011 was £10.60 (2010: £10.94) and the range during the  
year was £9.77 to £12.57 (2010: £7.625 to £10.94).

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

43

	
 
Directors’	report	continued

Auditor

The audit committee reviews the appointment of the external auditor and their relationship with the Group, including 
monitoring the Group’s use of the auditor for non-audit services. Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements sets out 
details of the auditor’s remuneration. Having reviewed the independence and effectiveness of the external auditor, the audit 
committee has recommended to the Board that the existing auditor, KPMG Audit Plc, be reappointed. KPMG Audit Plc have 
indicated their willingness to continue in office and ordinary resolutions reappointing them as auditor and authorising the 
directors to set their remuneration will be proposed at the 2012 AGM.

The directors in office at the date of signing of this report confirm that there is no relevant audit information of which the 
auditor is unaware and that each director has taken all reasonable steps to make him or herself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the auditor is aware of that information.

Annual General Meeting

The 2012 Annual General Meeting will be held on Thursday 10 May 2012 at 12.00 noon at 1 Curzon Street, London  
W1J 5FB. Full details of all resolutions and explanatory notes are set out in the separate notice of the meeting.

Special business

The resolutions proposed include an ordinary resolution to give the directors the authority to allot up to 14.4 million shares 
(with an aggregate nominal amount of up to £720,000). The Board are also seeking to renew, by special resolution, the 
existing authorities to waive pre-emption rights and to make market purchases of ordinary shares under certain stringent 
conditions (both subject to limits). The annual special resolution seeking the authority to convene a general meeting (other 
than the AGM) with not less than 14 days’ notice is also proposed.

It is anticipated that all directors will be at the AGM and available to answer questions.

By Order of the Board

Richard Loader 
Company Secretary

20 February 2012

Registered	office:

159 New Bond Street,  
London W1S 2UD

Please note that the registered office will change to 1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5FB with effect from 27 February 2012.

44	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Corporate governance report

In relation to compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code this report together with the directors’ report states the 
position at 20 February 2012.

The UK Corporate Governance Code compliance statement

The revised UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’) was issued in June 2010 by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) 
and applies for reporting periods beginning on or after 29 June 2010. Explanations of how the Code principles and supporting 
principles have been applied are set out in the governance sections of the report and accounts.

The directors believe the Company was in compliance with the Code throughout the year with the following two exceptions:

Independence	of	the	Chairman	on	appointment	(Provision	A.3.1)

Mark Powell who was chairman until his retirement following the AGM on 11 May 2011 did not, on appointment, meet the 
independence criteria set out in the Code since he had been an employee and executive director of the Company.

Composition	of	the	Board	(Provision	B.1.2)

There are currently 13 directors, of whom six (46%) are independent non-executive directors. The Code requires that at  
least half the Board, excluding the chairman, should be independent non-executive directors. Improvements to the working  
of the Board are being developed by the chairman and the chief executive following the Board performance evaluation  
referred to in the chairman’s statement.

Board meetings

The Board meets a minimum of seven times per annum with one meeting devoted entirely to strategic issues. Some  
Board meetings are preceded by Board dinners which allow for broader discussions. In months where no formal Board  
meeting is scheduled, an informal meeting of the non-executive directors and the chairman and chief executive is generally 
held. The non-executive directors also have informal meetings without the chairman or chief executive present.

Board membership

The Board currently consists of a non-executive chairman, seven executive directors and five other non-executive directors. 
The roles of chairman, Mark Nicholls, and chief executive, Andy Pomfret, are separated and are clearly defined in writing and 
agreed by the Board. The chairman is primarily responsible for the working of the Board and its development of strategy and 
the chief executive for the running of the business and implementation of Board strategy and policy.

The Board considers that all of the non-executive directors are independent.

The non-executive directors participate fully with their executive colleagues in Board meetings and have access to any 
information they need to perform their duties. They bring an independent judgement to bear on Group policies and strategies 
as well as management actions and performance, including resourcing and standards of conduct. The senior independent 
director is David Harrel, who is available to shareholders if they have concerns that they would rather not address to the 
chairman or executive directors or which remain unresolved after an approach through the normal channels.

The Board has a formal schedule of matters reserved for its attention, which covers key areas of the Group’s business.  
These include determination of the Group’s aims and the strategy to be adopted in achieving those aims, reviews of budgets  
and financial statements, company acquisitions and disposals, major capital expenditure and the review of decisions taken  
by the boards of subsidiary companies.

Board performance

The Board undertakes an annual review of its operation and performance. In 2011, this was carried out based on an internal 
questionnaire, developed and executed with assistance from Lintstock Limited, a London-based corporate advisory firm.

Directors

Individual appraisal of each director’s performance is undertaken by the chief executive (in respect of the executive  
directors’ executive roles) and the chairman (for all directors in respect of their contribution to the Board). This involves 
meetings with each director on a one to one basis. The non-executive directors, led by the senior independent director,  
carry out an appraisal of the performance of the chairman.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

45

	
Corporate	governance	report	continued

Board training

Rathbones is committed to the training and development of all staff to ensure professional standards are maintained  
and enhanced. All directors are required to dedicate a certain number of hours to their own development. Training and 
development include activities to keep up to date with Rathbones’ specific issues and industry, market and regulatory changes.

New directors are involved in a thorough induction process designed to enable them to become quickly familiar with the 
business. This includes meeting staff in a number of key business areas, attendance at routine meetings and demonstrations  
of systems and key business processes.

Board committees

The principal Board committees are the executive, audit, remuneration, nomination and risk management committees.  
The Board has delegated full authority to the executive committee, subject to a list of matters which are reserved for decision 
by the full Board. The other Board committees have formal terms of reference, which are reviewed and approved by the  
Board on an annual basis. These are available on request from the Company’s registered office and on the Group website.

Executive	Committee

The executive committee is chaired by the chief executive, Andy Pomfret, and comprises Ian Buckley, Paul Chavasse,  
Richard Lanyon and Paul Stockton. Richard Lanyon will step down from the committee on his retirement from the Board.  
The purpose of the executive committee is to monitor every aspect of the Group businesses on a continuing basis and to 
analyse and plan all business proposals in detail for submission to and consideration by the Board. It meets monthly  
and more frequently when required.

Audit	Committee

Current members of the audit committee are Oliver Corbett (chairman), Kate Avery, Caroline Burton, David Harrel and 
Kathryn Matthews. Details of its work are set out in the audit committee report.

Remuneration	Committee

Current members of the remuneration committee are Caroline Burton (chairman), Kate Avery, Oliver Corbett, David Harrel, 
Kathryn Matthews and Mark Nicholls. Full details of its role are set out in the remuneration report.

Nomination	Committee

Current members of the nomination committee are Mark Nicholls (chairman), Kate Avery, Caroline Burton, Oliver Corbett, 
David Harrel, Kathryn Matthews and Andy Pomfret. Full details of its role are set out in the nomination committee report.

Risk	Management	Committee

Current members of the risk management committee are Ian Buckley (chairman), Paul Chavasse, Oliver Corbett,  
Richard Lanyon, Kathryn Matthews, Andy Pomfret and Paul Stockton together with the heads of compliance, internal audit 
and risk, personnel and treasury. Ian Buckley will be standing down as chairman of the committee on 1 March 2012 and 
Kathryn Matthews will be taking on this role. Full details of its role are set out in the risk management report.

Conflicts of interest

A director has a duty under the Companies Act 2006 (‘the Act’) to avoid a situation where he has, or can have, a direct or 
indirect interest that conflicts or possibly may conflict with the Company’s interests. The Act allows the Board to authorise a 
director’s conflict or potential conflict of interest where the Articles of Association contain a provision to this effect and also 
allows the Articles of Association to contain other provisions for dealing with directors’ conflicts of interest to avoid a breach 
of duty. Shareholders approved the necessary changes to the Company’s Articles of Association at the AGM on 7 May 2008.

There are safeguards which apply when directors decide whether to authorise a conflict or potential conflict. Only independent 
directors (those who have no interest in the matter being considered) are able to take the relevant decision, and in taking the 
decision the directors must act in a way which they consider, in good faith, will be most likely to promote the Company’s 
success. The directors are also able to impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation.

A register of actual or potential conflicts notified and authorised is maintained and reviewed regularly by the Board.

46	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Corporate	governance	report	continued

Other Board issues

The Company has appropriate insurance cover in place in respect of legal action against its directors. Any director has  
access to the advice and services of the company secretary and may seek independent professional advice, if necessary, at  
the Company’s expense. The company secretary is responsible to the Board for ensuring Board procedures are followed and 
compliance with rules and regulations applicable to the Company. Any removal or appointment of the company secretary  
is decided by the Board.

Table	1.	Board	meeting	and	committee	attendance	in	2011

Plc Board

1

Executive  
Committee2

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination  
Committee

Risk  
Management 
Committee

C R R Avery
I M Buckley
C M Burton
P D G Chavasse
O R P Corbett
D T D Harrel
R P Lanyon
K A Matthews
A T Morris
M P Nicholls
A D Pomfret
G M Powell
R I Smeeton
R P Stockton

1   Scheduled bi-monthly meeting 
2   Scheduled monthly meeting

Shareholder relations

7/7

7/7

7/7
6/7

6/7

6/6

6/6

6/6
6/6

5/6

6/6

6/7
7/7
6/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
7/7
2/2
6/7
7/7

14/14

12/14

14/14

13/14

14/14

1/1

0/1

0/1
1/1

1/1

1/1
1/1
0/0

4/4

3/4
2/2

4/4
2/2

2/4

3/4

The Company is committed to ensuring that there is effective communication with all shareholders. All regulatory news 
announcements, press releases and financial reports are available on the Group website. An HTML version of the report and 
accounts is available online. Following the publication of the interim and full year results, presentations are given to major 
shareholders, investment managers, analysts and employees. The presentation packs used and any webcasts are also on the 
website. Meetings with major shareholders provide an opportunity to discuss governance and strategy issues and to introduce 
other directors including non-executive directors. Feedback from these meetings is reported to the Board. All shareholders have 
the opportunity to meet non-executive directors at the AGM. At least 20 business days’ notice of the AGM is given to allow 
time for proper consideration of the resolutions by shareholders. Separate resolutions are proposed for each substantially 
separate issue.

Every effort is made to ensure that all directors, and in particular committee chairmen, are at the meeting. The Board 
welcomes questions and comments from shareholders.

Votes are taken on a show of hands (unless a poll is requested) and full details of proxy voting figures are disclosed after the 
vote and on the website.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

47

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate	governance	report	continued

Going concern

The Company’s business activities, risks and uncertainties, financial performance in 2011 and the financial position at  
31 December 2011 are summarised in the business review on page 12 and risk management report on page 23. Note 28 to the 
consolidated financial statements summarises how the Group manages its financial risk.

Regulation

Rathbone Investment Management Limited, Rathbone Unit Trust Management Limited and Rathbone Pension & Advisory 
Services Limited are all authorised and regulated by the Financial Services Authority.

Rathbone Investment Management Limited is registered as an investment adviser with the US Securities and  
Exchange Commission.

Rathbone Investment Management International Limited is regulated by the Jersey Financial Services Commission.

The Board, together with the executive committee and the audit committee, have implemented systems and procedures  
to ensure adherence to the statutes and regulations relevant to each of the Group companies.

Model code

The Company has its own internal dealing rules which extend the Financial Services Authority Listing Rules Model Code 
provisions to all employees.

48	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Remuneration report

The Board presents the remuneration report for the year ended 31 December 2011.

Remuneration Committee Chairman’s statement

Following the introduction of both a new Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) and deferred profit share plan in 2010, 2011  
was a year of relatively little change in the principal components of total reward for executive directors. 

In December 2010, the FSA published a policy statement on the disclosure of remuneration in response to the 2008 financial 
crisis. Its aim is to ensure the disclosure of the remuneration policies and practices for those staff whose professional  
activities have a material impact on its risk profile. Rathbones’ profits are not generated by higher risk activities such as 
proprietary trading. The Board considers that the Company’s remuneration arrangements are consistent with the risk profile  
of the business. A remuneration policy statement was approved by the committee and the Board during the year.

Board salaries were increased by 3% with effect from 1 January 2012, in line with the increase given to the majority  
of employees.

Remuneration Committee

The Board has delegated the determination of executive director remuneration to the remuneration committee. The current 
members of the committee are the independent non-executive directors Caroline Burton (chairman), Kate Avery, Oliver 
Corbett, David Harrel and Kathryn Matthews. The chairman, Mark Nicholls, was considered independent on appointment  
as chairman and is also a member of the committee. 

The chief executive attends meetings at the invitation of the committee. Neither the chairman nor chief executive is present  
when their own remuneration is discussed. The committee met on six occasions in 2011 (2010: five). Details of attendance  
at meetings are shown on page 47.

Remuneration policy for executive directors

The overall aim of the remuneration policy is to support our longer term business objectives and promote behaviours which 
support value creation for shareholders, whilst at the same time providing a competitive remuneration package which is 
sufficient to attract and retain directors of the quality needed to manage and develop the Company successfully. Total reward 
is designed to include a balance of fixed and variable pay with a high level of deferral. External data is used to validate rather 
than to benchmark total reward.

The current remuneration package for an executive director has four main elements: basic salary and benefits, profit share, 
equity incentives and pension. The various elements are designed to:

•  align the interests of the directors with shareholders in generating long term shareholder value. Achieved through 

participation in:
–  an LTIP with a relative total shareholder return performance condition
–  profit share deferrals invested in Rathbone Brothers Plc shares

•  align remuneration practices with effective risk management. Achieved by the use of:

–  profit share based on profits rather than an income-based bonus
–  deferred awards (LTIP and partial deferral of profit share)

The committee also ensures that up to date, best practice contracts are adopted. The committee is satisfied that the incentive 
structure does not increase environmental, social and governance risks by inadvertently encouraging irresponsible behaviour.

The elements of remuneration packages are summarised in table 1.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

49

	
Remuneration	report	continued

Total executive director reward for 2011

Table	1.	Directors’	remuneration	(audited	information)	

Payments  
in lieu of  
pension  
contributions
£’000

Salary or  
1
fee
£’000

Profit
sharing
– cash
£’000

Profit
sharing
– deferred
2
shares
£’000

3
Benefits
£’000

2011 total
£’000

2010 total
£’000

2011
pension 
4
contributions
£’000

2010
pension
4 
contributions
£’000

Chairman
M P Nicholls

Executive
A D Pomfret (Chief Executive)
I M Buckley
P D G Chavasse
R P Lanyon
A T Morris
R I Smeeton
R P Stockton

Non-executive
C R R Avery
C M Burton
O R P Corbett
D T D Harrel
K A Matthews
Former Chairman
(G M Powell)
Former executive directors
Former non-executive directors

98

330
200
224
242
197
221
227

38
45
46
46
38
60

–
–

–

–
–
–
24
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–

–

101
53
76
99
48
94
71

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

204
107
152
197
95
188
142

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

1

5
4
5
5
5
5
5

3
3
3
2
3
2

–
–

99

5

640
364
457
567
345
508
445

41
48
49
48
41
62

–
–

636
352
421
578
349
553
402

35
42
45
40
36
168

37
56

–

38
23
–
–
–
–
22

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–

37
21
–
–
–
–
21

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

Total

2,012

24

542

1,085

51

3,714

3,755

83

79

This is the cash equivalent of deferred share awards at the date of the award. Deferred share awards vest after three years

1  Reviewed annually on 1 January
2 
3  Benefits include medical insurance and the value of SIP free shares and matching shares 
4  During the year, retirement benefits accrued under money purchase schemes in relation to three directors (2010: three)

Basic salary and benefits

An executive director’s basic salary is determined by the committee. Any change is implemented on 1 January of each year  
or when an individual changes position or responsibility. In deciding appropriate levels, the committee considers salaries 
throughout the Group as a whole and the information obtained on comparable companies in the financial sector as provided 
by the advisers to the committee. The views of the chairman and chief executive are also taken into consideration when 
considering the salaries of other directors.

With one exception, all directors received a salary increase of approximately 4% with effect from 1 January 2011 which  
was in line with the average increase for all employees. Ian Buckley received an increase of 7.8% to reflect significant 
additional responsibilities taken on during the year. Salaries were increased by 3% on 1 January 2012 in line with the  
increase given to most employees. The only exception was Richard Lanyon, whose salary was unchanged in view of his 
retirement from the Board on 10 May 2012.

In addition Rathbones provides a range of benefits including life, private medical and permanent health insurance. 

50	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Profit share

The current profit sharing scheme was introduced on 1 January 2010. Awards to all executive directors are made from a  
pool of profits of 3% – 5% of Group profit before tax with an expectation that in a normal year the percentage is around 4%. 
The percentage for 2011 was 4% (2010: 5%). An additional profit share payment of £61,000 was made to Richard Smeeton  
as a result of his giving up legacy entitlements. 

The committee has the discretion to adjust the calculation of Group profit before tax for the purposes of the profit share  
to ensure that it appropriately reflects underlying business performance. No adjustment was made in 2011. In 2010, the 
committee agreed that exceptional FSCS levies of £3.6 million should be excluded from the calculation.

Awards to individual directors are determined by the committee following recommendations by the chief executive and 
chairman having due regard of the performance of the director, the results of the business for which the director has 
responsibility (where relevant) and market data where this is available. Awards are capped at 200% of basic salary. 

Awards are made in both cash (one third) and deferred shares (two thirds) with interim, on account awards payable during  
the financial year, and final awards made shortly after the announcement of the Group’s results for the year. The proportion 
paid in cash may be increased at the request of the participant but this will cause the overall award to be reduced such that  
the total will be reduced by a maximum of one third if 100% of the award is taken in cash. No executive directors chose to 
increase the cash element of the award in 2010 or 2011.

No performance criteria are attached to the deferred share awards. The committee’s view is that share price movements  
reflect the performance of the business and therefore further performance conditions are not necessary. Half of deferred share 
awards will lapse if a director is a ‘bad leaver’. Deferred shares attract the monetary equivalent of declared dividends over  
the deferral period from the end of the financial year of the award. Awards vest on the third anniversary of the financial year 
end at which point a nil paid option will be granted over the deferred share award (including a further number of additional 
shares representing the value of dividends received and reinvested in relation to vested shares). This option may be exercised 
within seven years of grant.

The final deferred share award for 2010 was made on 4 March 2011. An interim deferred share award was made on  
26 September 2011. Awards were also made following dividend payments in May and October. The final award for 2011  
will be made following the announcement of the 2011 results on 21 February 2012.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

51

	
Remuneration	report	continued

Profit	share	continued 

Table	2.	Profit	share	–	deferred	share	awards	in	2011	(audited	information)	

Name

I M Buckley

Award type

Award date

Opening 
balance

3,313

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

Awarded

Lapsed

Closing 
balance

Market price at 
award date 

6,854
240
4,954
175

3,313
6,854
240
4,954
175

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

P D G Chavasse

4,375

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

7,328
276
5,621
201

4,375
7,328
276
5,621
201

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

3,313

12,223

–

15,536

4,375

13,426

–

17,801

R P Lanyon

11,472

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

11,117
533
10,385
389

11,472
11,117
5533
10,385
389

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

A T Morris

A D Pomfret

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

11,472

22,424

–

33,896

4,968

4,968

9,107

4,513
224
4,287
163

9,187

11,507
487
9,718
355

4,968
4,513
224
4,287
163

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

–

14,155

9,107
11,507
487
9,718
355

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

9,107

22,067

–

31,174

R I Smeeton

11,944

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

10,504
530
11,719
386

11,944
10,504
530
11,719
386

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

11,944

23,139

–

35,083

R P Stockton

4,375

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

Total

2010 final
Dividend

4 March 2011
18 May 2011
2011 interim 26 September 2011
5 October 2011 

Dividend

6,938
267
5,430
194

4,375

12,829

49,554

58,761
2,557
52,114
1,863

49,554

115,295

4,375
6,938
267
5,430
194

17,204

49,554
58,761
2,557
52,114
1,863

164,849

–

–
–
–
–

–

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

£11.963
£11.850
£10.496
£10.100

52	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Equity incentives

Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	(LTIP)

Executive directors are awarded rights to acquire ordinary shares at the start of a three year plan cycle. Awards are limited to 
75% of salary other than in exceptional circumstances when the committee considers that a 100% limit would be appropriate. 
At the end of each plan cycle, the Company’s performance is assessed against the performance targets for that cycle. The  
extent to which the targets have been achieved determines the actual number of shares (if any) attributable to each participant.

A new LTIP was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 11 May 2011 and came into effect for the 2011/13 plan cycle. 

The performance conditions for the plan cycles are as follows:

Performance targets 
2008/10, 2009/11 and 2010/12 plan cycles

Table	3.	LTIP	performance	targets

a Total Shareholder Return (TSR) over the plan cycle
b Earnings per Share (EPS) growth over the plan cycle

a TSR

TSR ranking relative to the constituents of the FTSE All Share Index

Below the 50th percentile
Between the 50th and 75th percentiles
At or above the 75th percentile

b EPS

EPS growth over the plan cycle

Less than 15%
15%
Over 15% but less than 37.5%
37.5% or over

% of award

50%
50%

Vesting of award (TSR element)

0%
Straight line increase
100%

Vesting of award (EPS element)

0%
25%
Straight line increase
100%

2011/13 and future plan cycles 
A combination of two performance targets will continue to be used. Whilst the EPS performance target will continue 
unchanged, changes to the TSR performance target were approved.

Table	4.	LTIP	TSR	performance	target

TSR over the plan cycle (50%)

Rathbone Brothers Plc Total Return Index (TRI) relative to the FTSE All Share TRI

Below the percentage change in the FTSE All Share TRI
Equal to the percentage change in the FTSE All Share TRI
Greater than the percentage change in the FTSE All Share TRI by 0.1% to 9.9%
Equal to or greater than the percentage change in the FTSE All Share TRI plus 10%

Vesting of award (TSR element)

0%
25%
Straight line increase
100%

The committee considers that the combination of EPS and TSR is most appropriate as it ensures not only focus on a key 
financial driver (via EPS), but also alignment of shareholder interests (via TSR), reflecting both the change in the share price 
and dividends, assuming that they are reinvested.

If a participant ceases to be employed for ‘good leaver’ reasons, the award shall normally continue in effect and vest  
on the original date set for vesting but with the award based on the performance during the plan cycle as a whole but  
reduced pro rata to reflect the fact that the participant was not an executive director for the whole plan cycle. In all  
other circumstances, any provisional award would lapse on cessation of employment.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

53

	
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	(LTIP)	continued

Vesting of historic awards 
2008/10 plan cycle 
The TSR for the three year period was 19.8%, which ranked the Company at the 62nd percentile relative to the constituents  
of the FTSE All Share Index, resulting in an award of 48.8% of the TSR element. Basic EPS decreased from 76.54p in 2007  
to 49.76p in 2010 and so no award was payable for this element of the plan. The awards were made in March 2011.

2009/11 plan cycle 
The TSR for the three year period was 46.2%, which ranked the Company at the 40th percentile relative to the constituents  
of the FTSE All Share Index. Basic EPS decreased from 67.02p in 2008 to 66.72p in 2011. No awards will therefore be made 
from either element of the plan.

2010/12 and 2011/13 plan cycles 
Details of the awards for the 2010/12 and 2011/13 plan cycles are set out in table 5.

Were the maximum possible awards to be made in shares to current and former directors as shown in table 5, 257,231 
ordinary shares (2010: 285,149) would be awarded, representing 0.6% (2010: 0.7%) of the issued share capital at  
31 December 2011, excluding shares held in treasury. In practice, awards under the LTIP are intended to be satisfied  
using market purchased shares. Expected actual awards are difficult to predict with any accuracy.

Table	5.	LTIP	awards	of	ordinary	shares	(audited	information)

I M Buckley

P D G Chavasse

R P Lanyon

A T Morris

A D Pomfret

R I Smeeton

R P Stockton

Total

At 1 January 
2011

Granted in 
2011

Vested in 
2011

Lapsed in 
2011

At  
31 December  
2011

Market value 
of shares at 
 date of  
award

Market value 
of shares at 
date of 
vesting 

18,905
16,904
–

20,685
21,187
–

20,685
21,187
–

16,192
16,585
–

28,247
28,933
–

18,905
19,365
–

18,460
18,909
–

–
–
13,856

–
–
16,766

–
–
16,766

–
–
13,648

–
–
22,863

–
–
15,311

–
–
14,951

142,079
143,070
–

–
–
114,161

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

18,905
–
–

20,685
–
–

20,685
–
–

16,192
–
–

28,247
–
–

18,905
–
–

18,460
–
–

–
16,904
13,856

–
21,187
16,766

–
21,187
16,766

–
16,585
13,648

–
28,933
22,863

–
19,365
15,311

–
18,909
14,951

142,079
–
–

–
143,070
114,161

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

£8.43
£8.23
£10.825

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

Plan cycle

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

2009/11
2010/12
2011/13

The LTIP awards listed above are the maximum awards achievable assuming all performance targets are met and that the participant is an executive director for the 
whole plan cycle. The value of these awards when made was 75% of a participant’s basic salary. The market value of shares at the date of the award is the average 
mid-market price over the 20 dealing days prior to the start of the plan

54	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Share	Incentive	Plan	(SIP)	and	Save	As	You	Earn	(SAYE)

All directors are entitled to take part in the SIP on the same terms as all other employees. This allows all employees to purchase 
shares in the Company and currently these are matched on a one-for-one basis by the Company. Performance related SIP 
shares are also offered to employees if there is year on year EPS growth over the rate of inflation. SIP shares are included in  
the table of directors’ share interests on page 42.

Executive directors may also participate in the Rathbones SAYE scheme on the same terms as all other employees. Details  
of grants to directors are shown in table 6. It is anticipated that a further grant will be made in March 2012 following the 
announcement of the 2011 results.

Table	6.	The	Rathbone	SAYE	scheme	(audited	information)	

Grant date

23/12/09
23/12/09
23/12/09
23/12/09
29/03/11
23/12/09
23/12/09
23/12/09
29/03/11

At  
1 January 
2011

Granted in 
2011

Exercised in 
2011

Lapsed in 
2011

At  
31 December 
2011

Earliest  
exercise 
date

Latest  
exercise  
date

Exercise  
price

1,303
1,303
1,303
651
–
1,303
1,303
651
–

7,817

483

483

966

1,303 01/02/13
1,303 01/02/13
1,303 01/02/13
651 01/02/13
483 01/05/14
1,303 01/02/13
1,303 01/02/13
651 01/02/13
483 01/05/14

01/08/13
01/08/13
01/08/13
01/08/13
01/11/14
01/08/13
01/08/13
01/08/13
01/11/14

696p
696p
696p
696p
934p
696p
696p
696p
934p

–

–

8,783

I M Buckley
P D G Chavasse
R P Lanyon
A T Morris
A T Morris
A D Pomfret
R I Smeeton
R P Stockton
R P Stockton

Total

Share	options

The Company’s share option scheme was approved by shareholders in November 2000 with a ten year life and so no further 
grants may now be made. The outstanding options held by directors at the start of the year lapsed during the year. Details are 
set out in table 7. 

Table	7.	Outstanding	share	options	and	movements	in	the	year	(audited	information)

R P Stockton

Former director
P G Pearson Lund

Total

At  
1 January  
2011

30,000

9,966

39,966

Exercised in  
2011

–

–

–

Lapsed in  
2011

30,000

9,966

39,966

At  
31 December  
2011

Date of  
grant

Earliest  
exercise 
date

Exercise  
price

22/08/08

22/08/11 813.50p

24/04/01

24/04/04 827.50p

–

–

–

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

55

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Dilution

Not more than 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company (adjusted for bonus and rights issues) will be  
issued for all LTIP and share incentive schemes operated by the Company in any rolling ten year period. While it remains  
best practice to do so, treasury shares will be treated as newly issued shares for the purposes of dilution calculations. The  
Company satisfies the various equity-based schemes it operates using a combination of market purchased, newly issued  
and treasury shares.

Chart	1.	Total	Shareholder	Return	(TSR)	over	the	last	five	financial	years

e
g
a
t
n
e
c
r
e
P

15

10

5

0

-5

-10

-15

-20

-25

-30

31 December 2006 

31 December 2007 

31 December 2008 

31 December 2009 

31 December 2010 

31 December 2011

Rathbone Brothers Plc – Total Shareholder Return
FTSE All Share – Total Shareholder Return

Chart 1 shows the Company’s TSR against the FTSE All Share Index. TSR is calculated assuming that dividends are reinvested 
on receipt. The FTSE All Share Index has been selected as a comparator as it is a suitably broad market index and has been  
used as a performance comparator for LTIP plan cycles since 2005/07.

Pension arrangements

UK employees who joined Rathbones prior to 1 April 2002 were offered membership of a defined benefit scheme, the 
Rathbone 1987 Pension Scheme with a normal retirement age of 60. Prior to 1 April 2006, the accrual rate was 1/60th for 
each year of membership. With effect from 1 April 2006, employees were given the choice of either remaining on a 1/60th 
accrual rate (but increasing their contribution rate from 5% to 6.5% at 1 April 2006 and to 8% from 1 January 2008)  
or switching to a 1/70th accrual rate for future pensionable service (but continuing to contribute at 5%). With effect from  
1 July 2009, future service benefits are based on career average revalued earnings (CARE) with a normal retirement age  
of 65 rather than 60.

Details of the Company’s contributions are set out in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

Since 1 April 2002, new employees have been offered membership of a group defined contribution plan, established  
with Scottish Widows. In the case of certain directors and senior staff, the Group contributes to their personal  
pension arrangements.

Paul Chavasse, Andrew Morris and Richard Smeeton are members of the Rathbone 1987 Pension Scheme. Richard Lanyon 
transferred out of this scheme on 15 March 2011 and has since been paid 10% of salary in lieu of pension scheme 
contributions. Ian Buckley, Richard Lanyon, Andy Pomfret and Paul Stockton participate in the scheme for death in service 
benefits only. 

Richard Smeeton is also a member of the Laurence Keen Retirement Benefits Scheme (see note 24) for service prior to  
1 October 1999. Ian Buckley and Andy Pomfret have arrangements under self-invested personal pension schemes whilst  
Paul Stockton is a member of the group defined contribution plan. 

The changes in pension entitlements arising in the year, required to be disclosed by the UK Listing Authority, are shown in 
table 8. There have been no changes in the terms of directors’ pension entitlements during the year. There are no unfunded 
pension promises or similar arrangements for directors. The increases in transfer values are mainly due to changed 
assumptions for inflation, post-retirement discount rates and future mortality.

56	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Pension	arrangements	continued

Table	8.	Directors’	accrued	benefits	under	defined	benefit	schemes	(audited	information)

P D G Chavasse
A T Morris
R I Smeeton

Age at  
31/12/11
47
47
47

Years of  
service at 
31/12/11
11
23
23

Accrued  
benefit at 
1 
31/12/11 
£
41,535
70,896
82,812

Increase in  
accrued  
benefits 
excluding  
2
inflation 
£
2,956
2,019
1,155

Increase in 
accrued  
benefits 
including  
3
inflation 
£
4,723
5,174
4,895

Transfer value  
Transfer 
of increase 
value of  
in accrued 
accrued  
benefits less 
benefits at 
directors’ 
31/12/11 
contributions 
£
£
32,112
702,659
28,741 1,562,614
4,070 1,559,473

Transfer 
value  
of accrued  
benefits at 
31/12/10 
£
514,401
1,125,649
1,152,468

Increase 
in transfer 
value less 
directors’ 
4
contributions 
£
170,362
421,205
389,325

During 2011, four directors (2010: four) accrued benefits under defined benefit schemes. R P Lanyon transferred his benefits out of the scheme during the year.

1  The pension entitlement shown above for the three participating directors is that which would be paid annually on retirement at age 60 or 65 based on service  

to 31 December 2011 (or normal retirement date, if earlier)

2  The additional pension earned in the year excluding UK inflation (RPI)
3  The additional pension earned in the year including UK inflation (RPI)
4  The increase in transfer value represents the additional capital amount less a director’s contributions necessary to fund the increase in the accrued pension that  
  a director would take with him as part of the total transfer value if he were to leave the scheme

There is no undertaking or expectation for any other pension benefit to be arranged for any director by the Company.

Service contracts for executive directors

The Company has service contracts with its executive directors which were reviewed and modernised in 2011. Following his 
appointment as head of investment management, Paul Chavasse’s notice period was increased from 6 to 12 months. It is 
Company policy that such contracts should not normally contain notice periods of more than 12 months. Details of the 
contracts of employment of executive directors serving during the year are as shown in table 9.

Table	9.	Executive	directors’	service	contracts

Executive director

I M Buckley
P D G Chavasse
R P Lanyon
A T Morris
A D Pomfret
R I Smeeton
R P Stockton

Date of contract

24 October 2011
15 November 2011
21 November 2011
26 October 2011
13 October 2011
9 December 2011
14 October 2011

Notice period

6 months
12 months
12 months1
6 months
12 months
6 months
6 months

1  R P Lanyon’s notice period will revert to 6 months on his retirement from the Board

There are no provisions within the contracts to provide automatic payments in excess of payment in lieu of notice upon 
termination by the Company and no pre-determined compensation package exists in the event of termination of employment. 
Payment in lieu of notice would include basic salary, pension contributions and benefits. There are no provisions for the  
payment of liquidated damages or any statements in respect of the duty of mitigation. Compensation payments will be 
determined on a case by case basis in the light of current market practice. Compensation will include loss of salary and other 
contractual benefits but mitigation will be applied where appropriate. In the event of entering into a termination agreement,  
the Board will take steps to impose a legal obligation on the director to mitigate any loss incurred. There are no clauses in 
contracts amending employment terms and conditions on a change of control. Executive directors’ contracts of service,  
which include details of remuneration, will be available for inspection at the Annual General Meeting.

Shareholdings

New executive directors are encouraged to build up and maintain a shareholding at least equivalent to the value of one year’s 
basic salary within five years of taking up their appointment.

External appointments

Executive directors are encouraged to take on external appointments as non-executive directors, but are discouraged from 
holding more than one other position in a quoted company given the time commitment. Prior approval of any new 
appointment is required by the Board with fees generally being payable to the Company.

An exception is Ian Buckley. Following his appointment as a committee member of the Family Assurance Friendly Society  
on 14 December 2009, he retains the fee paid of £30,000 per annum (2010: £27,350).

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

57

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration	report	continued

Advisers to the Remuneration Committee

The remuneration committee has appointed Deloitte LLP (‘Deloitte’) as advisers to the committee. Deloitte attend at least one 
committee meeting per annum and advise on best practice and latest developments in senior executive remuneration. The 
committee is confident that their advice is objective and independent and they operate in line with the executive remuneration 
consulting voluntary code of conduct.

Deloitte also provides occasional ad hoc advice to the Company, particularly on share scheme issues. The appointment is 
reviewed annually. The committee is also assisted by the personnel department and by the company secretary.

Non-executive directors

Non-executive directors do not have contracts of employment but, as with all other directors, are now required to stand for  
re-election annually in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code. The effectiveness of the non-executive directors  
is subject to an annual assessment. The executive directors are responsible for determining the fees of the non-executive 
directors, who do not receive pension or other benefits from the Group and do not participate in any Group incentive scheme, 
other than the SIP.

Non-executive directors’ fees

Fees were increased with effect from 1 January 2011 and from 1 January 2012 as shown in table 10. 

Table	10.	Non-executive	directors’	fees

Basic fee
Additional fees
– Chairman of the Audit Committee
– Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
– Chairman of the Risk Management Committee

– Senior independent director

2012 
£

2011 
£

2010 
£

40,000

38,000

35,000

10,000
10,000
10,000

10,000

8,000
7,000
–

8,000

7,500
5,000
–

5,000

The chairman, Mark Nicholls, received a fee at the rate of £60,000 per annum prior to his appointment as chairman on  
11 May 2011. From that date his fee has been paid at the rate of £120,000 per annum.

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

The committee considers that, taken together, these various remuneration components help to align the interests of directors 
with those of shareholders and conform to the principles laid down in the UK Corporate Governance Code published  
in June 2010 and effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 29 June 2010. The Board will move at the AGM  
an ordinary resolution seeking approval of the directors’ remuneration report for 2011. The Notice of AGM has been 
circulated separately.

Approved by the Board on 20 February 2012 and signed on its behalf by

Caroline Burton 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

58	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Audit Committee report

Committee members

The current members of the audit committee are the independent non-executive directors Oliver Corbett (chairman),  
Kate Avery, Caroline Burton, David Harrel and Kathryn Matthews.

The Board is satisfied that at least one member of the committee has recent and relevant financial experience. The chairman 
is a chartered accountant whilst other members have extensive experience of financial matters and of the financial services 
industry.

The committee met on seven occasions in 2011 (2010: five). Details of attendance by members are set out on page 47.

Role and responsibilities of the committee

These are set out in the terms of reference of the committee, which are reviewed annually.

Financial reporting

The committee considers:

•   the significant financial reporting issues and judgements made in connection with the Company’s financial reporting;

•   the Group’s accounting policies and any proposed changes;

•  narrative statements and disclosures to ensure that they are reasonable and consistent with the reported results; and

• 

regulatory financial reporting.

Internal controls and risk management systems

The review of the effectiveness of the Group’s internal financial controls is achieved primarily by the assessment of the work 
of the Group internal audit department, reports produced by the compliance functions, the half year and annual financial 
statements, the scope and findings of the annual external audit and periodic reviews of identified risks and mitigating controls 
undertaken by senior management.

During 2011, the committee discussed a number of issues including the 2010 audit process, segmental reporting, Financial 
Services Compensation Scheme levies, pension scheme actuarial valuation assumptions, the effectiveness of the annual report 
and capital modelling. It also undertook a detailed review of the 2012 and longer term internal audit review programmes.

A separate risk management report considers risk management issues (see page 23).

Internal audit

The Group internal audit department reviews Group operations on a continuing basis. The frequency of reviews is determined 
by an internal risk-based audit programme which is approved by the audit committee. This ensures that, whilst the focus is 
on higher risk areas, all parts of the business are covered over a three year cycle. Regular updates are given to the committee 
on the findings of internal audit reviews, the status of scheduled work and on the follow-up of reviews to ensure that agreed 
recommendations are acted upon promptly. The committee sees all reviews containing a high risk-related recommendation 
and a sample of other reviews.

The internal audit department will also undertake occasional ad hoc reviews at the request of management or the committee. 
The committee regularly reviews the resources and authority of the Group internal audit department.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

59

	
Audit	Committee	report	continued

External audit

The committee is responsible for reviewing external audit arrangements and for any recommendation to the Board regarding 
change of audit firm. This review includes consideration of the external auditor’s period in office, their compensation and the 
scope, quality and cost-effectiveness of their work. 

The committee reviews the independence and the nature of non-audit services supplied by the auditor and non-audit fee  
levels relative to the audit fee. Prior approval by the committee is required where the fee for an individual non-audit service 
is expected to exceed £25,000. Fees for non-audit services paid to the auditor should not, in aggregate, exceed 50% of the 
audit fee in any year without the prior written approval of the committee. 

Non-audit fees payable to the auditor in 2011 were £114,000. This represents 23.2% of the fees for assurance services of 
£491,000, which includes the audit of regulatory returns and of the interim statement (2010: £301,000, 67.3% of £447,000). 
The committee recognises that, given their knowledge of the business, there are often advantages in using the auditor to  
provide certain non-audit services. 

The committee is satisfied that the independence of the auditor has not been impaired by providing these services. Details  
of the auditor’s fees are shown in note 7 to the consolidated financial statements. The committee also reviews the audit 
engagement letters each year and has discussions with the auditor with no management present.

Regarding the 2011 audit, presentations were received from the auditor on audit progress, findings and recommendations  
and any adjusted and unadjusted errors. 

Confidential reporting policy

The committee annually reviews the Group’s Public Interest Disclosure Act 1998 confidential reporting policy and approves  
any changes to the document. It also receives details of any reports made.

Other

On invitation, the finance and other executive directors, compliance officers, senior finance and internal audit staff and  
the external auditor attend meetings to assist the committee to fulfil its duties. The committee can access independent 
professional advice if it considers it necessary. The committee performs an annual review of its performance and this is  
also reviewed by the Board.

60	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Nomination Committee report

Committee members

The current members of the nomination committee are Mark Nicholls (chairman), Kate Avery, Caroline Burton, Oliver 
Corbett, David Harrel, Kathryn Matthews and Andy Pomfret. 

The committee met formally on one occasion in 2011 (2010: two). Details of attendance by members are set out on page 47. 
The principal issues discussed were the terms of reference of the committee, the Board performance evaluation and succession 
planning. It also had informal discussions on a number of other occasions during the year. 

Role of the committee

The committee considers and makes recommendations to the Board for the appointment of directors; the Board as a whole 
decides upon any such appointment. An external search consultancy and/or open advertising are used when recruiting 
new directors. When considering possible candidates, the committee evaluates the skills, knowledge and experience of the 
candidates and, in the case of non-executive appointments, their other commitments. The committee is mindful of the benefits 
of a diverse Board with a broad range of skills and experience and this has been reflected in recent Board appointments.

Regarding succession planning, the Board is exposed to senior management below Board level during visits to other offices, 
attendance at internal meetings and presentations by senior managers to the Board.

In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, all directors are required to seek election by the members at the 
AGM following their appointment, and re-election every year thereafter. A non-executive director is not appointed for a fixed 
term but would not normally serve as a director for more than nine years.

The committee is mindful of the UK Corporate Governance Code requirement that any term beyond six years for a non-
executive director should be subject to particularly vigorous review and should take into account the need for progressive 
refreshing of the Board.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

61

	
Statement of directors’ responsibilities in respect of 
the report and accounts

The directors are responsible for preparing the annual report and the consolidated and Company financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare consolidated and Company financial statements for each financial year. Under 
that law they are required to prepare the consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU and 
applicable law and have elected to prepare the Company financial statements on the same basis.

Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and 
fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of 
the consolidated and Company financial statements, the directors are required to:

• 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent;

• 

state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU; and

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the 

Company will continue in business.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They have general responsibility for taking such 
steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the directors are also responsible for preparing a directors’ report, remuneration report 
and corporate governance report that complies with that law and those regulations.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the 
Group’s websites. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Disclosure of information to the auditor

The directors who held office at the date of approval of this directors’ report confirm that, so far as they are each aware, 
there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and each director has taken all the steps 
that he or she ought to have taken as a director to make him or herself aware of any relevant audit information  
and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of that information.

Statement as a result of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial  
Services Authority

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

• 

• 

the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view 
of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Company and its undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

the directors’ report, together with the information provided in the business review, financial review and risk management 
report, includes a fair view of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and 
uncertainties that they face.

By Order of the Board

A D Pomfret 
Chief Executive

20 February 2012

62	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Consolidated financial statements

64 

66 
67 
68 
69 
70 

Independent auditor’s report to the members of  
Rathbone Brothers Plc
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
Consolidated balance sheet
Consolidated statement of cash flows
Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

63

	
Independent auditor’s report to the members of 
Rathbone Brothers Plc

We have audited the Group financial statements of Rathbone Brothers Plc for the year ended 31 December 2011 which  
comprise the consolidated and Company statement of comprehensive income, consolidated and Company statement of  
changes in equity, consolidated and Company balance sheet, consolidated and Company statement of cash flows and related 
notes. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the EU.

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not 
accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit 
work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor

As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement in respect of the report and accounts set out on page 62, 
the directors are responsible for the preparation of the Group financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit, and express an opinion on, the Group financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the 
Auditing Practices Board’s (APB’s) Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements

A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is provided on the APB’s website at: 
www.frc.org.uk/apb/scope/UKP.cfm

Opinion on financial statements

In our opinion:

•   the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group and parent company’s affairs as at  

31 December 2011 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•   the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU;

•   the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU  

and as applied in accordance with the provision of the Companies Act 2006; and

•   the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as 

regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion:

•   the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the  
  Companies Act 2006;

•   the information given in the directors’ report for the financial year for which the Group financial statements are  

prepared is consistent with the Group financial statements; and

•   the information given in the corporate governance report set out on page 45 with respect to internal control and risk 
  management systems in relation to financial reporting processes and about share capital structures is consistent with  

the Group financial statements.

64	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
Independent	auditor’s	report	to	the	members	of	Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	continued

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following:

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•   adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not  

been received from branches not visited by us; or

•   the parent company financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in 

agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

•   certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

•   we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

•   a corporate governance report has not been prepared by the Company.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

•   the directors’ statement, set out on page 22, in relation to going concern;

•   the part of the corporate governance report on page 45 relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions  

of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review; and

•   certain elements of the report to shareholders by the Board on directors’ remuneration.

I Cummings (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG Audit Plc, Statutory Auditor

Chartered Accountants 
15 Canada Square, London E14 5GL

20 February 2012

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

65

	
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 December 2011

Interest and similar income
Interest expense and similar charges

Net interest income

Fee and commission income
Fee and commission expense

Net fee and commission income

Dividend income
Net trading income
Gains on disposal of financial securities
Other operating income

Operating income

Exceptional levies to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme
Amortisation of acquired client relationships
Head office relocation costs
Other operating expenses

Operating expenses

Profit before tax
Taxation

Profit after tax

Profit for the period attributable to equity holders of the Company

Other comprehensive income:
Exchange translation differences
Net actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
Revaluation of available for sale investment securities:
– net (loss)/gain from changes in fair value
Deferred tax relating to components of other comprehensive income:
– revaluation of available for sale investment securities
– actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations

Other comprehensive income net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the year net of tax
attributable to equity holders of the Company

Dividends paid and proposed for the year per ordinary share
Dividends paid and proposed for the year
Earnings per share for the period attributable to equity holders of the Company:
– basic
– diluted

Note

4

5

6

6

6

6

7

19

8

7

10

24

15

11

12

2011 
£’000

11,259
(1,238)

10,021

141,484
(10,029)

131,455

98
480
1,095
1,303

144,452

–
(5,134)
(3,028)
(97,138)

(105,300)

39,152
(10,446)

28,706

28,706

–
(6,383)

(134)

94
1,477

(4,946)

23,760

46.00p
20,001

66.72p
65.90p

2010 
£’000

10,274
(1,445)

8,829

124,432
(7,762)

116,670

90
226
–
1,369

127,184

(3,575)
(4,845)
–
(88,681)

(97,101)

30,083
(8,531)

21,552

21,552

9
(3,005)

155

(13)
782

(2,072)

19,480

44.00p
19,067

49.76p
49.35p

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

66	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
for the year ended 31 December 2011 

Note

Share  
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
£’000

Merger 
reserve 
£’000

Available 
for sale 
reserve 
£’000

Translation 
reserve 
£’000

Treasury 
shares 
£’000

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
equity 
£’000

At 1 January 2010
Profit for the year

2,165

31,756

31,835

2,077

245

(4,032) 118,443 182,489
21,552
21,552

Exchange translation differences
Net actuarial loss on retirement

benefit obligations

Revaluation of available for sale

investment securities

Deferred tax relating to components
of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive income

net of tax

Dividends paid
Issue of share capital
Reclassification of translation reserve

on disposal of subsidiaries

Share-based payments:
– value of employee services
– cost of treasury shares acquired
– cost of treasury shares vesting
– tax on share-based payments

At 1 January 2011
Profit for the year

Net actuarial loss on retirement

benefit obligations

Revaluation of available for sale

investment securities

Deferred tax relating to components
of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive income

net of tax

Dividends paid
Issue of share capital
Share-based payments:
– value of employee services
– cost of treasury shares acquired
– cost of treasury shares vesting
– tax on share-based payments

24

15

11

25

26

26

24

15

11

25

26

26

9

9

155

(13)

–

4

–

732

–

142

9

(3,005)

(3,005)

155

782

769

–

(2,223)
(18,167)

(2,072)
(18,167)
736

(254)

254

–

2,169

32,488

31,835

2,219

–

(134)

94

–

9

–

–

(40)

–

1,728

(569)
1,702

1,054

(1,702)
351

1,054
(569)
–
351

(2,899) 119,562 185,374
28,706
28,706

(6,383)

(6,383)

(134)

1,477

1,571

–

(4,906)
(19,491)

(4,946)
(19,491)
1,737

(2,955)
1,125

1,989

(1,125)
239

1,989
(2,955)
–
239

At 31 December 2011

2,178

34,216

31,835

2,179

–

(4,729) 124,974 190,653

  The accompanying notes form an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

67

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated balance sheet 
as at 31 December 2011

Assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Investment securities:
– available for sale
– held to maturity
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax asset
Intangible assets

Total assets

Liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Accruals, deferred income, provisions and other liabilities
Current tax liabilities
Retirement benefit obligations

Total liabilities

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Merger reserve
Available for sale reserve
Treasury shares
Retained earnings

Total equity

Total liabilities and equity

Note

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

13

14

15

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

24

25

25

26

4
13,443
65,008
47,787

68,563
843,983
38,413
10,660
3,134
92,844

4
18,169
39,565
40,025

42,587
751,085
36,368
6,143
2,474
91,702

1,183,839

1,028,122

513
22,196
908,656
50,924
3,557
7,340

993,186

2,178
34,216
31,835
2,179
(4,729)
124,974

190,653

3,304
23,712
762,026
42,455
4,608
6,643

842,748

2,169
32,488
31,835
2,219
(2,899)
119,562

185,374

1,183,839

1,028,122

The financial statements were approved by the Board of directors and authorised for issue on 20 February 2012 and  
were signed on its behalf by:

A D Pomfret  
Chief Executive  

R P Stockton 
Finance Director

Company registered number: 01000403

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

68	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Consolidated statement of cash flows 
for the year ended 31 December 2011

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax
Net interest income
Net (recoveries)/impairment charges on impaired loans and advances
Net charge for provisions
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation and amortisation
Defined benefit pension scheme charges
Share-based payment charges
Interest paid
Interest received

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
– net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances to banks and customers
– net decrease/(increase) in settlement balance debtors
– net increase in prepayments, accrued income and other assets
– net increase/(decrease) in amounts due to customers and deposits by banks
– net (decrease)/increase in settlement balance creditors
– net increase in accruals, deferred income, provisions and other liabilities

Cash generated from operations
Defined benefit pension contributions paid
Tax paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, equipment and intangible assets
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of investment securities
Proceeds from sale and redemption of investment securities

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Purchase of shares for share-based schemes
Issue of ordinary shares
Dividends paid

Net cash used in financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

Note

14

23

24

9

24

15

15

32

11

32

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

2011 
£’000

39,152
(10,021)
(1)
2,465
(17)
8,997
1,484
2,604
(1,282)
10,359

53,740

(8,523)
4,726
(1,133)
143,841
(1,516)
3,725

194,860
(7,170)
(10,345)

177,345

2010 
£’000 
restated (note1)

30,083
(8,829)
95
572
(37)
8,405
1,510
1,729
(1,413)
11,754

43,869

24,572
(864)
(7,980)
(8,410)
1,555
6,026

58,768
(7,285)
(6,089)

45,394

(12,976)
41
(1,565,418)
1,472,520

(30,417)
128
(1,679,090)
1,622,005

(105,833)

(87,374)

(2,259)
1,041
(19,491)

(20,709)

50,803
79,069
–

129,872

(286)
453
(18,167)

(18,000)

(59,980)
139,044
5

79,069

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

69

	
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements

1 

Principal accounting policies

Rathbone Brothers Plc (‘the Company’) is a public company incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales under the 
Companies Act 2006.

The consolidated and Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the EU (IFRS). The Company financial statements are presented on pages 116 to 133.

Changes	in	accounting	policies	and	disclosures

a  Presentation of primary statements 

Two changes have been made to the presentation of the primary statements in these consolidated financial statements 
compared to the previous year. The consolidated income statement and consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
have been re-presented this year as a combined consolidated statement of comprehensive income. In addition, other  
reserves are now shown individually on the face of the balance sheet rather than in aggregate.

  The consolidated statement of cash flows now separately discloses the net change in provisions through profit or loss  
as a single line item in cash flows from operating activities. There has been no change to the net cash inflow from  
operating activities or the net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents. The comparative balances have been 
reclassified to be consistent with this presentation.

b  Segmental information 

As described in note 3, the presentation of segmental information has been changed to reflect changes in the segmental 
information provided to the Group executive committee, which is the Group’s chief operating decision maker.

  The results of the business areas previously reported as Trust and Tax Services are now included within the Investment 
Management segment for reporting segmental results (note 3), fee and commission income (note 5) and headcount  
(note 9 and 36).

In addition, fee income from trust, tax and pensions advisory activities are now reported separately as fees from advisory 
services. Total net fee and commission income included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income is now 
comprised of net investment management fee income, net commission and fees from advisory services.

  Comparative balances in the segmental analysis for the full year to 31 December 2010 have been reclassified to be  

consistent with the revised presentation.

Developments	in	reporting	standards	and	interpretations

Standards affecting the financial statements 
In the current year, there have been no new or revised standards and interpretations that have been adopted and have affected 
the amounts reported in these financial statements.

Standards not affecting the reported results or the financial position 
The following new and revised standards and interpretations have been adopted in the current year. Their adoption has not  
had any significant impact on the amounts reported in these financial statements but may impact the accounting for future 
transactions and arrangements:

• 

IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures (revised 2009)’

•  Amendments to IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’ as part of ‘Improvements to IFRS (2010)’

•  Amendments to IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ as part of ‘Improvements to IFRS (2010)’

•  Amendments to IAS 34 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’ as part of ‘Improvements to IFRS (2010)’

Amendments to IFRIC 14 ‘Prepayments of a Minimum Funding Requirement’ have been adopted in the current year but  
have had no material impact on these financial statements.

New standards and interpretations 
A number of new standards and amendments to standards and interpretations are effective for annual periods beginning  
after 1 January 2011, and therefore have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements. None of these  
is expected to have a significant effect on the consolidated financial statements of the Group, except for IFRS 9 ‘Financial 
Instruments’ and IAS19 ‘Employee Benefits’, which are not yet adopted by the EU and are not expected to become mandatory  
for periods commencing before 1 January 2013.

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ could change the classification and measurement of financial assets. The Group does not plan to 
adopt this standard early and the extent of the impact has not been determined.

70	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

Developments in reporting standards and interpretations	continued

IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’ is not yet adopted by the EU but is expected to become mandatory for the Group’s consolidated 
financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2013. The amendments to IAS 19, if applied for the year ended  
31 December 2011, would reduce profit after tax by approximately £1,118,000 and increase actuarial gains in other 
comprehensive income by the same amount. There would be no effect on total equity. The Group does not plan to adopt  
this standard early.

Basis	of	consolidation

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the 
Company (its subsidiaries), together ‘the Group’, made up to 31 December each year.

Subsidiaries are all entities in which the Company has a controlling interest, generally accompanying a shareholding of 
more than one half of the voting rights. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or  
convertible are considered when assessing whether an entity is a subsidiary of the Company. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated 
from the date on which control is obtained. They are deconsolidated from the date that control ceases. The results of  
subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements up to the date that control ceases.

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries. The cost of an acquisition is  
measured as the fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of 
exchange. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured 
initially at their fair values at the acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any minority interest. The excess of the cost  
of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. If the cost  
of acquisition is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised directly in  
profit or loss.

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies are eliminated.  
Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of impairment of the asset transferred.

For subsidiaries with non-coterminous year ends, financial statements are drawn up to 31 December for the purposes  
of consolidation.

Basis	of	preparation

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for certain financial instruments that are 
measured at fair value. The principal accounting policies adopted are set out below. The accounting policies set out below  
have, unless otherwise stated, been applied consistently to all periods presented in the consolidated financial statements.

The directors have, at the time of approving the financial statements, a reasonable expectation that the Company and the  
Group have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Thus they continue to adopt  
the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements. Further detail is contained in the financial review  
on page 17.

Net	interest	income

Interest income and expense are recognised in other comprehensive income for all instruments measured at amortised cost  
and for available for sale debt instruments using the effective interest method. Dividends receivable from money market  
funds are included within net interest income.

The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset or a financial liability and 
of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that 
exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts through the expected life of the financial instrument or, when  
appropriate, a shorter period to the net carrying amount of the financial asset or financial liability. When calculating the  
effective interest rate, the Group estimates cash flows considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument but does  
not consider future credit losses. The calculation includes all fees and interest paid or received between parties to the 
contract that are an integral part of the effective interest rate, transaction costs and all other premiums or discounts.

Once a financial asset or a group of similar financial assets has been written down as a result of an impairment loss, interest 
income is recognised using the rate of interest used to discount the future cash flows for the purpose of measuring the  
impairment loss.

Dividend	income

Dividend income from final dividends on equity securities is accounted for on the date the security becomes ex-dividend.  
Interim dividends are recognised when received.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

71

	
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

Operating	leases

Lease agreements which do not transfer substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership of the leased assets to the  
Group are classified as operating leases. Payments made under operating leases are recognised in other comprehensive income  
on a straight line basis over the term of the lease. Lease expense recognised in other comprehensive income is adjusted for the 
impact of any lease incentives.

Fees	and	commissions

Portfolio and other management advisory and service fees are recognised on a continuous basis over the period the service  
is provided. Asset management fees are recognised evenly over the period the service is provided.

Trail commissions receivable and payable are accounted for on a continuous basis over the period in which they are earned. 
Commission charges for executing transactions on behalf of clients are recognised when the transaction is dealt.

To the extent that initial charges received on the sale of units arise from an identifiable brokerage service, the income is  
recognised on the performance of that service. Other initial charges are deferred and recognised as income on a straight line  
basis over the estimated average life of the unit holding.

Property,	plant	and	equipment

All property, plant and equipment is stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. Historical  
cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items.

Depreciation is charged so as to write off the cost of assets to their estimated residual value over their estimated useful lives,  
using the straight line method, on the following bases:

Leasehold property:  
Plant, equipment and computer hardware:  

over the lease term 
over three to ten years

The assets’ residual lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These are included in  
profit or loss.

Intangible	assets

a  Goodwill 

Goodwill arising on consolidation represents the excess of the cost of acquisition over the Group’s interest in the fair  
value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of a subsidiary at the date of acquisition.

  Goodwill is recognised as an asset and is reviewed for impairment at least annually, or when other occasions or changes  
in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired. Any impairment is recognised immediately in profit or loss and is  
not subsequently reversed. Goodwill arising on acquisition is allocated to groups of cash generating units that correspond  
with the Group’s segments, as these represent the lowest level within the Group at which management monitor goodwill  
for purposes of impairment testing. Cash generating units are identified as the smallest identifiable group of assets that 
generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.

  On disposal of a subsidiary the attributed amount of goodwill that has not been subject to impairment is included in  

the determination of the profit or loss on disposal.

  Goodwill arising on acquisitions before the date of transition to IFRS has been retained at the previous UK GAAP  

amounts subject to being tested for impairment at that date and annually thereafter.

b  Computer software and software development costs 

Acquired computer software licences are capitalised on the basis of the costs incurred to acquire and bring to use the  
specific software. These costs are amortised on the basis of the expected useful lives (three to four years).

  Costs that are directly associated with the production of identifiable and unique software products controlled by the  

Group are recognised as intangible assets when the recognition requirements of IAS 38 are met. Computer software 
development costs recognised as assets are amortised using the straight line method over their useful lives (not exceeding  
four years).

  Costs associated with developing or maintaining computer software programs that are not recognised as assets are  

recognised as an expense as incurred.

72	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

c  Client relationships 

Client relationships acquired are initially recognised at cost. Those recognised in respect of business combinations are  
initially recognised at fair value. Client relationships have a finite useful life and are carried at cost less accumulated 
amortisation. Amortisation is calculated using the straight line method to allocate the cost of the client relationships over  
their estimated useful lives (ten to fifteen years). When client relationships are lost the full amount of unamortised cost  
is recognised immediately and the intangible asset is derecognised.

Financial	assets

The Group classifies its financial assets in the following categories: financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans  
and receivables, held to maturity investments and available for sale financial assets. The classification of financial assets  
is determined at initial recognition. Financial assets are initially recognised at fair value.

a  Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

This category has two sub-categories: financial assets held for trading, and those designated at fair value through profit  
or loss at inception. A financial asset is classified in this category if acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the  
short term or if so designated. Derivatives, which are categorised as fair value through profit or loss, are reported within  
other assets or other liabilities.

b  Loans and receivables 

Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in  
an active market. They arise when the Group provides money, goods or services to a debtor or purchases a loan with no 
intention of trading the receivable. Loans and receivables are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest  
method, less any impairment.

c  Held to maturity 

Held to maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments and fixed maturities  
that the Group’s management has the positive intention and ability to hold to maturity, other than those that meet the 
definition of loans and receivables or that the Group has classified as available for sale or fair value through profit or loss. 
Held to maturity investments are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method less any impairment,  
with revenue recognised on an effective yield basis.

d  Available for sale 

Available for sale financial assets are non-derivatives that are either designated in this category or not classified in any  
of the other categories. Available for sale investments are those intended to be held for an indefinite period of time,  
which may be sold in response to needs for liquidity or changes in interest rates, exchange rates or equity prices.

Purchases and sales of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, held to maturity and available for sale are recognised  
on trade-date – the date on which the Group commits to purchase or sell the asset. Loans are recognised when cash is  
advanced to the borrowers. Financial assets are initially recognised at fair value plus transaction costs for all financial assets  
not carried at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows from  
the financial assets have expired or been effectively transferred, or where the Group has transferred substantially all risks and 
rewards of ownership.

Available for sale financial assets and financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss are subsequently carried at fair  
value. Loans and receivables and held to maturity investments are carried at amortised cost using the effective interest  
method. Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are  
included in profit or loss in the period in which they arise. Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of available  
for sale financial assets are recognised in other comprehensive income and presented in the available for sale reserve in equity,  
until the financial asset is sold, derecognised or impaired at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in  
equity should be recognised in profit or loss. However, interest calculated using the effective interest method is recognised  
in profit or loss.

The fair values of quoted financial instruments in active markets are based on current bid prices. If the market for a financial  
asset is not active (and for unlisted securities), the Group establishes fair value by using valuation techniques. These include  
the use of recent arm’s length transactions, discounted cash flow analysis, option pricing models and other valuation  
techniques commonly used by market participants.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

73

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

Impairment

Goodwill and other intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are tested for impairment annually, and when there is an 
indication of impairment.

Financial assets and other assets with finite useful lives are assessed for impairment when there is objective evidence of  
impairment during the accounting period. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in  
order to determine the extent of the impairment loss (if any). Held to maturity investment securities and loans and receivables  
are considered individually for impairment.

The recoverable amount of non-financial assets is the higher of fair value less any cost to sell and value-in-use. In assessing  
value-in-use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present values using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects  
current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset for which the estimates of future  
cash flows have not been adjusted. The recoverable amount of held to maturity investment securities and loans and receivables  
is calculated as the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the effective interest rate of the asset on  
recognition. Where an asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from other assets, the Company estimates the 
recoverable amount of the cash generating unit to which the asset belongs.

Impairment of available for sale securities is calculated as the cumulative loss that has been previously recognised directly  
in equity at the time that objective evidence of impairment is identified.

If the recoverable amount of an asset or cash generating unit is estimated to be less than its carrying amount, the carrying  
amount of the asset or cash generating unit is reduced to its recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognised as an  
expense immediately.

Where an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of any asset, except for goodwill, equity instruments  
or cash generating units, is increased to the revised estimate of its recoverable amount, which is no greater than the carrying 
amount that would have been determined had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset or cash generating unit in  
prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss is recognised as income immediately, unless the relevant asset is carried at a  
revalued amount, in which case the reversal of the impairment loss is treated as a revaluation increase.

An impairment loss in respect of a held to maturity investment security or loans and receivables is reversed only if the value 
increase can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised.

An impairment loss in respect of an investment in equity instruments classified as available for sale is not reversed through  
profit or loss. If the fair value of a debt instrument classified as available for sale increases and the increase can be objectively 
related to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised in profit or loss, the impairment is reversed through  
profit or loss.

Deposits	and	borrowings

All deposits and borrowings are initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration received. After initial recognition, 
deposits and borrowings are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Amortised cost  
is calculated by taking into account any issue costs and any discounts or premiums on settlement. Borrowing costs are recognised  
as an expense in the period in which they are incurred.

Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event which 
it is probable will result in an outflow of economic benefits that can be reliably estimated. Provisions are measured at the  
present value of the expenditures expected to be required to settle the obligation using a pre-tax rate that reflects current  
market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the obligation. The increase in the provision due 
to the passage of time is recognised within interest expense.

Foreign	currencies

The Company’s functional and the Group’s presentational currency is Sterling. Transactions in currencies other than the  
relevant Group entity’s functional currency are recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing on the dates of the transactions.  
At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities that are denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the  
rates prevailing on the balance sheet date. Non-monetary financial assets carried at fair value that are denominated in  
foreign currencies are translated at the rates prevailing at the date when the fair value was determined.

Gains and losses arising on retranslation are included in net profit or loss for the period, except for exchange differences  
arising on non-monetary assets and liabilities, where the changes in fair value are recognised directly in equity.

74	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

Foreign currencies	continued

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the  
foreign entity and translated at the closing rate. Gains and losses arising on translation are taken to the Group’s translation 
reserve. The Group has elected to treat goodwill and fair value adjustments denominated in a currency other than the Group’s 
functional currency arising on acquisitions before the date of transition to IFRS as non-monetary foreign currency items and  
they are translated using the exchange rate applied on the date of acquisition.

Retirement	benefit	obligations

The cost of providing benefits under defined benefit plans are determined using the projected unit credit method, with  
actuarial valuations being carried out at each balance sheet date. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in the  
period in which they occur in other comprehensive income.

Past service cost is recognised immediately to the extent that the benefits are already vested, and otherwise is amortised on  
a straight line basis over the average period until the amended benefits become vested.

The amount recognised in the balance sheet represents the present value of the defined benefit obligations reduced by the fair  
value of plan assets. Any asset resulting from this calculation is limited to the present value of available refunds and reductions  
in future contributions to the plan.

Death in service benefits are provided to all employees through the pension schemes. The amount recognised in the balance  
sheet for death in service benefits represents the present value of the estimated obligation, reduced by the extent to which  
any future liabilities will be met by insurance policies.

Payments to defined contribution retirement benefit schemes are charged as an expense as they fall due.

Taxation

Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in profit or loss except to the extent 
that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which case it is recognised in equity.

Current tax receivable or payable is the expected tax receivable or payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax  
rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax receivable or payable in respect  
of previous years.

Deferred tax is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method in respect of temporary differences arising from  
differences between the carrying amount of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax basis  
used in the computation of taxable profit. In principle, deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all temporary differences  
and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which  
deductible temporary differences may be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary  
difference arises:

• 
• 

from the initial recognition of goodwill for which amortisation is not deductible for tax purposes; or 
from the initial recognition of other assets and liabilities in a transaction, which affects neither the tax profit nor the 
accounting profit, other than in a business combination.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, 
except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is the Group’s intention not to  
reverse the temporary difference in the foreseeable future.

The carrying amounts of deferred tax assets are reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is  
no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet  
date and are expected to apply when the liability is settled or when the asset is realised. Deferred tax is charged or credited to 
profit or loss, except when it relates to items credited or charged directly to equity, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt  
with in equity.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the  
Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

75

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

1	 Principal	accounting	policies	continued

Cash	and	cash	equivalents

Cash comprises cash in hand.

Cash equivalents comprise money market funds which are realisable on demand and loans and advances to banks with a  
maturity of less than three months from the date of acquisition.

For the purposes of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents  
as defined above, net of outstanding bank overdrafts.

Share-based	payments

The Group engages in share-based payment transactions in respect of services received from certain employees. In relation  
to equity settled share-based payments, the fair value of the services received is measured by reference to the fair value of the  
shares or share options granted on the date of the grant. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares  
or share options granted is recognised in profit or loss over the vesting period, with a corresponding credit to equity.

The fair value of the options granted is determined using option pricing models, which take into account the exercise price  
of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the Company’s share price over the  
life of the option/award and other relevant factors. Except for those which include terms related to market conditions,  
vesting conditions included in the terms of the grant are not taken into account in estimating fair value. Non-market vesting 
conditions are taken into account by adjusting the number of shares or share options included in the measurement of the  
cost of employee services so that ultimately, the amount recognised in profit or loss reflects the number of vested shares  
or share options, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. Where vesting conditions are related to market conditions, the 
charges for the services received are recognised regardless of whether or not the market related vesting condition is met,  
provided that the non-market vesting conditions are met. Shares purchased and issued are charged directly to equity.

For cash-settled share-based payments, a liability is recognised for the services received, measured initially at the fair value  
of the liability. At the date on which the liability is settled, and at each balance sheet date between grant date and settlement,  
the fair value of the liability is remeasured with any changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss for the year.

Segmental	reporting

The Group determines and presents operating segments based on the information that is provided internally to the Group 
executive committee, which is the Group’s chief operating decision maker. An operating segment is a component of the  
Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses, including revenues and  
expenses that relate to transactions with any of the Group’s other components, whose operating results are reviewed regularly  
by the Group executive committee to make decisions about resources allocated to the segment and assess its performance,  
and for which discrete financial information is available.

Operating segments are organised around the services provided to clients; a description of the services provided by each  
segment is given in Rathbones at a glance on page 9. No operating segments have been aggregated in the Group’s financial 
statements. Transactions between operating segments are reported within the income or expenses for those segments. Indirect 
costs are allocated between segments in proportion to the principal cost driver for each category of indirect costs that is  
generated by each segment.

Fiduciary	activities

The Group commonly acts as trustee and in other fiduciary capacities that result in the holding or placing of assets on behalf  
of individuals, trusts, retirement benefit plans and other institutions. Such assets and income arising thereon are excluded  
from these financial statements, as they are not assets of the Group. The Group holds money on behalf of some clients in 
accordance with the Client Money Rules of the Financial Services Authority. Such monies and the corresponding amounts  
due to clients are not shown on the face of the balance sheet as the Group is not beneficially entitled to them.

Financial	guarantees

The Group provides a limited number of financial guarantees which are fully backed by assets in clients’ portfolios. Financial 
guarantees are initially recognised in the balance sheet at fair value. Guarantees are subsequently measured at the higher of  
the best estimate of any amount to be paid to settle the guarantee and the amount initially recognised less cumulative 
amortisation, which is recognised over the life of the contract.

76	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

2 

Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation and uncertainty

The Group makes estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities within the next  
financial year. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, 
including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

Financial	Services	Compensation	Scheme	levies	(note	7)

The arrangements put in place by the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) to protect depositors and investors  
from loss in the event of failure of financial institutions have resulted in significant levies on the industry in recent years.  
The financial impact of FSCS levies are largely out of the Group’s control as they result from other industry failures.

In February 2011, the Group received invoices totalling £3.2 million in relation to interim levies by the FSCS following the  
failure of Keydata Investment Services Limited (‘Keydata’) and other intermediaries. These charges were presented as an 
exceptional levy in the financial statements in 2010. No such exceptional levies have been accrued in 2011 as no further large  
and unexpected levies have been made by the FSCS. Levies of £353,000 have been included within administrative expenses  
in 2011.

There is a significant degree of uncertainty over the level of future FSCS levies as this depends on the ultimate cost to the  
FSCS of the failure of other entities in the financial services industry. The FSCS announced in its December 2011 Outlook 
Statement that it expects to have to raise an interim levy of £40 million against the investment intermediary class of firms,  
which includes a number of Group companies, following additional compensation costs incurred from Keydata and other  
stockbrokers. An accrual of £36,000 has been charged to profit or loss in 2011 for the Group’s share of this. Against this,  
the FSCS is pursuing recoveries from parties found to be responsible for mis-selling Keydata investments. Whilst any  
recoveries are expected to reduce future levies, the amount and timing of these reductions is unknown.

The FSCS has also announced that it is considering whether it will be able to pay claims to investors who have incurred losses  
on investments with CF Arch Cru Funds and MF Global Investors, following the failure of both entities. The FSCS has not  
yet quantified the likely cost of compensation to affected investors but it notes that, if such compensation is payable, the 
additional levies would likely trigger a cross-subsidy by the investment management class of firms, which would be a cost to  
the Group. It is currently not possible to quantify the impact of these failures.

We understand that the FSCS 15 in the process of re-negotiating the terms of the £18 billion of loans that it took out in  
2008/09 to cover the costs of five major depositor failures, and that the FSCS hopes to bring these negotiations to a conclusion 
before the end of June 2012. Any increase in the interest cost of these loans will result in an increase in the annual costs of the 
FSCS levies borne by the Group.

Vendor	loan	notes	(note	14)

The Group holds vendor loan notes (‘Notes’) with a nominal value of £5,000,000 issued by the acquirer of the Group’s Jersey 
trust operations in 2008. The Notes are repayable on the occurrence of certain events, principally the refinancing of the  
operations disposed of.

The carrying value of the Notes has been calculated as £3,268,000 using a discounted cash flow model based on the estimated 
repayment date, using a discount rate equal to the initial effective interest rate of the loan. Changing the estimated repayment  
date of the Notes by one year would result in an increase or decrease in their carrying value of approximately £294,000. A 1% 
increase/decrease in the assumed rate at which interest accrues under the loan would increase/decrease the carrying value of  
the loan by approximately £100,000, with a consequent equal change in profit before tax.

Client	relationship	intangibles	(note	19)

The Group makes estimates about the expected duration of client relationships to determine the period over which related 
intangible assets are amortised. The amortisation period is estimated with reference to historical data on account closure rates  
and management’s expectations for the future. During the year client relationship intangible assets were amortised over a  
10 – 15 year period. Amortisation of £5,134,000 was charged during the year. A reduction in the average amortisation period  
of one year would increase the amortisation charge by approximately £453,000.

In determining whether a client relationship is lost, management consider factors such as the level of funds withdrawn and  
the existence of other retained family relationships.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

77

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

2	 Critical	accounting	judgements	and	key	sources	of	estimation	and	uncertainty	continued

Retirement	benefit	obligations	(note	24)

The Group makes estimates about a range of long term trends and market conditions to determine the value of the deficit on  
its retirement benefit schemes, based on the Group’s expectations of the future and advice taken from qualified actuaries.  
The principal assumptions underlying the reported deficit of £7,340,000 are given in note 24.

Long term forecasts and estimates are necessarily highly judgemental and subject to risk that actual events may be significantly 
different to those forecast. If actual events deviate from the assumptions made by the Group then the reported surplus or  
deficit in respect of retirement benefit obligations may be materially different. The history of experience adjustments and 
information on the sensitivity of the retirement benefit obligations to changes in underlying estimates is set out in note 24.

3 

Segmental information

For management purposes, the Group is currently organised into two operating divisions: Investment Management and Unit 
Trusts. The products and services from which each reportable segment derives its revenues are described in Rathbones at a 
glance on page 9. These segments are the basis on which the Group reports its performance to the executive committee,  
which is the Group’s chief operating decision maker. Certain items of income are presented within different categories of 
operating income in the financial statements compared to the presentation for internal reporting.

Following the completion of the disposal of the Group’s overseas trust businesses, the presentation of segmental information  
has been amended to include the remaining trust and tax operations within the Investment Management segment. This change 
reflects management’s view that the retained trust-related activities support the investment management business and are not 
sufficiently material in their own right to constitute a separate segment of the business.

31 December 2011

Net investment management fee income
Net commission income
Fees from advisory services
Net interest and other income

Underlying operating income

Staff costs – fixed
Staff costs – variable

Total staff costs
Other direct expenses
Allocation of indirect expenses

Underlying operating expenses

Underlying profit before tax
Gains on disposal of financial securities (note 6)
Exceptional levies to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (note 7)
Amortisation of client relationships (note 19)

Segment profit before tax
Head office relocation costs (unallocated) (note 8)

Profit before tax attributable to equity holders of the Company
Taxation

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the Company

Segment total assets
Unallocated assets

Total assets

Investment 
Management 
£’000

80,086
36,170
7,637
11,216

135,109

(31,649)
(15,770)

(47,419)
(13,284)
(29,013)

(89,716)

45,393
1,095
–
(5,134)

41,354

Unit Trusts 
£’000

7,562
–
–
686

8,248

(2,503)
(1,071)

(3,574)
(1,828)
(2,020)

(7,422)

826
–
–
–

826

Investment 
Management 
£’000

1,154,085

Unit Trusts 
£’000

16,428

Total 
£’000

87,648
36,170
7,637
11,902

143,357

(34,152)
(16,841)

(50,993)
(15,112)
(31,033)

(97,138)

46,219
1,095
–
(5,134)

42,180
(3,028)

39,152
(10,446)

28,706

Total 
£’000

1,170,513
13,326

1,183,839

78	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

3	 Segmental	information	continued

31 December 2010 (restated – note 1)

Net investment management fee income
Net commission income
Fees from advisory services
Net interest and other income

Underlying operating income

Staff costs – fixed
Staff costs – variable

Total staff costs
Other direct expenses
Allocation of indirect expenses

Underlying operating expenses

Underlying profit before tax
Exceptional levies to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (note 7)
Amortisation of client relationships (note 19)

Profit before tax attributable to equity holders of the Company

Taxation

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the Company

Segment total assets
Unallocated assets

Total assets

Investment 
Management 
£’000

66,511
35,713
7,372
10,171

119,767

(28,912)
(13,988)

(42,900)
(12,524)
(26,632)

(82,056)

37,711
(3,332)
(4,845)

29,534

Investment 
Management 
£’000

1,004,917

Unit Trusts 
£’000

7,074
–
–
343

7,417

(2,161)
(1,233)

(3,394)
(1,545)
(1,686)

(6,625)

792
(243)
–

549

Unit Trusts 
£’000

12,923

Total 
£’000

73,585
35,713
7,372
10,514

127,184

(31,073)
(15,221)

(46,294)
(14,069)
(28,318)

(88,681)

38,503
(3,575)
(4,845)

30,083

(8,531)

21,552

Total 
£’000

1,017,840
10,282

1,028,122

Included within Investment Management net fee and commission income is £1,547,000 (31 December 2010: £1,225,000)  
of fee and commission receivable from Unit Trusts. Intersegment sales are charged at prevailing market prices.

Centrally incurred indirect expenses are allocated to operating segments on the basis of the cost drivers that generate the expenditure.

Geographic	analysis

The following table presents underlying operating income analysed by the geographical location of the Group entity providing 
the service:

Underlying operating income by geographical market

United Kingdom
Jersey

2011 
£’000

139,128
4,229

143,357

2010 
£’000

123,119
4,065

127,184

The following is an analysis of the carrying amount of non-current assets analysed by the geographical area in which the  
assets are located:

Non-current assets by geographical location

United Kingdom
Jersey

Major	clients

2011 
£’000

102,641
863

103,504

2010 
£’000

97,053
792

97,845

The Group is not reliant on any one client or group of connected clients for generation of revenues.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

79

	
 
 
	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

4  

Net interest income

Interest income
Held to maturity investment securities
Available for sale investment securities
Loans and advances to banks and customers

Interest expense
Banks and customers

Net interest income

5 

Net fee and commission income

Fee and commission income
Investment Management
Unit Trusts

Fee and commission expense
Investment Management
Unit Trusts

Net fee and commission income

2011 
£’000

9,016
309
1,934

11,259

(1,238)

10,021

2010 
£’000

8,083
555
1,636

10,274

(1,445)

8,829

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 1)

126,980
14,504

141,484

(4,634)
(5,395)

(10,029)

131,455

111,502
12,930

124,432

(3,131)
(4,631)

(7,762)

116,670

6 

Dividend, net trading and other operating income

Dividend	income

Dividend income comprises income from available for sale equity securities of £98,000 (2010: £90,000).

Net	trading	income

Net trading income of £480,000 (2010: £226,000) comprises unit trust net dealing profits.

Gains	on	disposal	of	financial	securities

This comprises a one-off gain of £1,095,000 from long stock positions held by firms acquired by the Group in the 1990s,  
against which all claims are now considered to be exhausted and which have been recognised following regulatory approval.

Other	operating	income

Other operating income of £1,303,000 (2010: £1,369,000) comprises rental income from sub-leases on certain properties  
leased by Group companies and sundry income.

80	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

7 

Operating expenses

Staff costs (note 9)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 17)
Amortisation of internally generated intangible assets included in operating

expenses (note 19)

Amortisation of purchased software (note 19)
Auditor’s remuneration (see below)
Net (recoveries)/impairment charges on impaired loans and advances (note 14)
Operating lease rentals
Other

Other operating expenses
Exceptional levies to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme¹
Amortisation of client relationship intangible assets (note 19)
Head office relocation costs (note 8)

Total operating expenses

2011 
£’000

64,503
2,384

357
1,122
605
(1)
7,366
20,802

97,138
–
5,134
3,028

105,300

2010 
£’000

58,997
2,207

355
998
748
95
5,299
19,982

88,681
3,575
4,845
–

97,101

1  The arrangements put in place by the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) to protect depositors of failed institutions resulted in significant levies on the 
industry (see note 2). The failure of Keydata Investment Services Limited (‘Keydata’) and other intermediaries resulted in a considerable increase in the levy made by  
the FSCS to the Group in the 2010/11 levy year, which was recognised in the financial statements in 2010. The Group accrued £3,575,000 in respect of its share 
of the cost of FSCS borrowings including a provision for the 2010/11 levy year, of which £3,203,000 related to Keydata and other intermediaries. No such 
abnormal levy has been recognised in 2011

A more detailed analysis of auditor’s remuneration is provided below:

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the Company’s

annual financial statements

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors and their associates for other

services to the Group:

– audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation
– other services pursuant to legislation
– tax services
– other services
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors in respect of the prior year

2011 
£’000

87

236
168
39
75
–

605

2010 
£’000

84

286
86
53
192
47

748

Of the above, £491,000 relates to assurance services (2010: £447,000).

Fees for other services pursuant to legislation include £71,000 for the audit of the Group’s regulatory returns and review  
of the interim statement (2010: £77,000).

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

81

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

  8  Head office relocation costs

  Rathbones announced on 16 May 2011 that it had exchanged contracts for a 12 year lease of 42,200 sq ft of office space  
on the 3rd and 4th floors of 1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5FB. It is expected that the move from the current head office 
premises in New Bond Street, London will be completed by the end of February 2012. Charges of £3,028,000 relating to  
the move have been recognised during the year (2010: £nil).

Staff costs – wages and salaries
Provision for onerous lease
Provision for dilapidations
Rent, rates and service charge on unoccupied premises
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Other

2011 
£’000

146
276
920
1,463
148
75

3,028

2010 
£’000

–
–
–
–
–
–

–

  In addition to the above costs charged to profit in the year, a further £4,815,000 (2010: £nil) of costs for fitting-out the new 

London premises have been capitalised as leasehold improvements (note 17).

  9  Staff costs

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Share-based payments
Pension costs: (note 24)

– defined benefit schemes
– defined contribution schemes

  The average number of employees during the year was as follows:

Investment Management:
– investment management services
– advisory services
Unit Trusts
Shared services

2011 
£’000

52,554
6,090
2,604

1,484
1,771

3,255

64,503

2011

467
66
29
184

746

2010 
£’000

48,671
5,771
1,729

1,510
1,316

2,826

58,997

2010 
restated (note 1 )

432
64
24
179

699

82	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

10 

Income tax expense

Current tax:
– charge for the year
– adjustments in respect of prior years
Deferred tax: (note 18)
– charge for the year
– adjustments in respect of prior years

2011 
£’000

9,766
(470)

1,219
(69)

10,446

2010 
£’000

8,200
82

467
(218)

8,531

The tax charge on profit for the year is higher (2010: higher) than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 26.5% 
(2010: 28.0%). The differences are explained below:

Tax on profit from ordinary activities at the standard rate of 26.5% (2010: 28.0%)
Effects of:
– disallowable expenses
– share-based payments
– tax on overseas earnings
– over-provision for tax in previous years
– other
Effect of change in corporation tax rate

2011 
£’000

10,373

513
(15)
81
(539)
(24)
57

10,446

2010 
£’000

8,423

340
(30)
(77)
(136)
(35)
46

8,531

The UK Government has proposed that the UK corporation tax rate be reduced to 23.0% over the four years from 2011. At 
31 December 2011 only an element of this reduction, taking the UK tax rate to 25.0% in 2012, had been substantively enacted. 
Consequently deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated at 25.0%.

In addition to the amount charged to profit or loss, deferred tax relating to actuarial gains and losses, share-based payments 
and gains and losses arising on available for sale investment securities amounting to £1,810,000 has been credited directly to 
equity (2010: £1,120,000).

11  Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:
– second interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2010 of 28.0p
(final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2009: 26.0p) per share

– first interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2011 of 17.0p

(2010: 16.0p) per share

Dividends paid in the year of 45.0p (2010: 42.0p) per share

Proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 December
2011 of 29.0p (2010: second interim dividend of 28.0p per share)

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

12,123

7,368

19,491

11,246

6,921

18,167

12,633

12,146

An interim dividend of 17.0p per share was paid on 5 October 2011 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 
16 September 2011 (2010: 16.0p).

A final dividend declared of 29.0p per share is payable on 17 May 2012 to shareholders on the register at the close of business 
on 27 April 2012. The final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2012 
and has not been included as a liability in these financial statements.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

83

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

12 

Earnings per share

Earnings used to calculate earnings per share on the bases reported in these financial statements were:

Underlying profit attributable to shareholders
Gains on disposal of financial securities (note 6)
Exceptional levies to the Financial Services

Compensation Scheme (note 7)

Amortisation of client relationships (note 19)
Head office relocation costs (note 8)

2011 
Pre-tax  
£’000

2011 
Taxation 
£’000

2011 
Post-tax  
£’000

2010 
Pre-tax  
£’000

2010 
Taxation 
£’000

2010 
Post-tax  
£’000

46,219
1,095

(12,318)
(290)

33,901
805

38,503 (10,889)
–

–

27,614
–

–
(5,134)
(3,028)

–
1,360
802

–
(3,774)
(2,226)

(3,575)
 (4,845)
–

1,001
1,357
–

(2,574)
(3,488)
–

Profit attributable to shareholders

39,152

(10,446)

28,706

30,083

(8,531)

21,552

Basic earnings per share has been calculated by dividing earnings by the weighted average number of shares in issue 
throughout the period of 43,027,127 (2010: 43,307,423).

Diluted earnings per share is the basic earnings per share, adjusted for the effect of contingently issuable shares under the 
Long Term Incentive Plan, employee share options remaining capable of exercise and any dilutive shares to be issued under 
the Share Incentive Plan, weighted for the relevant period (see table below):

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period – basic
Effect of ordinary share options/Save As You Earn
Effect of dilutive shares issuable under the Share Incentive Plan
Effect of contingently issuable ordinary shares under the Long Term Incentive Plan

Diluted ordinary shares

Underlying earnings per share for the year attributable to equity holders of the Company:
– basic
– diluted

13 

Loans and advances to banks

Repayable:
– on demand or at short notice
– 3 months or less excluding on demand or at short notice
– 1 year or less but over 3 months

Amounts include loans with:
– variable interest rates
– fixed interest rates
– non-interest bearing

2011

2010

43,027,127
201,651
98,654
235,027

43,307,423
76,153
116,364
169,580

43,562,459

43,669,520

2011

2010

78.79p
77.82p

63.76p
63.23p

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

33,254
31,004
750

65,008

33,102
31,754
152

65,008

31,305
8,260
–

39,565

28,084
11,430
51

39,565

 The fair value of loans and advances is not materially different to their carrying amount. Fair value has been calculated as the 
discounted amount of estimated future cash flows expected to be received using current market rates.

Loans and advances to banks included in cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2011 were £64,258,000 (note 32) 
(2010: £39,565,000).

The Group’s exposure to credit risk arising from loans and advances to banks is described in note 28.

84	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

14 

Loans and advances to customers

Repayable:
– on demand or at short notice
– 3 months or less excluding on demand or at short notice
– 1 year or less but over 3 months
– 5 years or less but over 1 year
With no fixed repayment date
Less: allowance for losses on loans and advances

Amounts include loans with:
– variable interest rates
– non-interest bearing

2011 
£’000

7,844
11,443
25,342
–
3,268
(110)

47,787

46,550
1,237

47,787

2010 
£’000

4,461
10,129
22,040
271
3,267
(143)

40,025

35,182
4,843

40,025

 The fair value of loans and advances to customers is not materially different to their carrying amount. Fair value has been 
calculated as the discounted amount of estimated future cash flows expected to be received using current market rates.  
Debtors arising from the trust and pensions businesses are non-interest bearing.

The allowance for losses on loans and advances relate to debtors for trust and pension services. The total debtors in 
relation to trust and pension services included in loans and advances to customers as at 31 December 2011 amount to 
£852,000 (2010: £1,062,000). No banking loans and advances to customers were impaired as at 31 December 2011  
(2010: none impaired).

Included within loans and advances to customers with no fixed repayment date are vendor loan notes (‘Notes’) carried at 
amortised cost of £3,268,000 at 31 December 2011 (2010: £3,267,000). The Notes have a nominal value of £5,000,000  
and were issued by the acquirer of the Group’s Jersey trust operations in 2008. The Notes are subordinated and unsecured,  
and are repayable on the occurrence of certain events, principally the refinancing of the Jersey trust operations by their  
existing owners.

The Notes bore no interest for three years from their issue date. In October 2011, interest started to roll-up into the loan  
at half of the Bank of England base rate. From October 2013 interest will roll-up at the Bank of England base rate. The  
carrying value of the Notes has been calculated based on a discounted cash flow model and interest income is recognised  
over the expected life of the Notes under the effective interest rate method.

Included within loans and advances to customers repayable within three months is a Swiss Franc denominated loan to 
the acquirer of the Group’s former Switzerland-based trust operations with a nominal value equivalent to £406,000 at  
31 December 2011 (2010: £565,000). The loan does not bear interest and the final instalment was received on  
10 February 2012.

Allowance	for	losses	on	loans	and	advances

At 1 January
Amounts written off
Amounts recovered
Charge to profit or loss

2011 
£’000

143
(32)
(6)
5

110

2010 
£’000

82
(34)
–
95

143

	The Group’s exposure to credit risk arising from loans and advances to customers is described in note 28.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

85

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

15 

Investment securities

Available	for	sale	securities

Equity securities – at fair value:
– listed
– unlisted
Money market funds – at fair value:
– unlisted

Held	to	maturity	securities

Debt securities – at amortised cost:
– unlisted

Maturity	of	debt	securities

Due within 1 year
Due after more than 1 year

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

2,384
569

65,610

68,563

2,513
574

39,500

42,587

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

843,983

843,983

2011 
£’000

833,983
10,000

843,983

751,085

751,085

2010 
£’000

731,085
20,000

751,085

 Debt securities comprise bank and building society certificates of deposit, which have fixed coupons and UK treasury bills.

The fair value of debt securities at 31 December 2011 was £848,096,000 (2010: £754,893,000). Fair value for held to 
maturity assets is based on market bid prices.

Available for sale securities include money market funds and direct holdings in equity securities. Equity securities do not bear 
interest. Money market funds, which declare daily dividends that are in the nature of interest at a variable rate and which are 
realisable on demand, have been included within cash equivalents (note 32).

The Group has not reclassified any financial asset between being measured ‘at amortised cost’ and being measured ‘at fair  
value through profit or loss’ during the year (2010: none reclassified). The Group has not designated at initial recognition  
any financial asset as ‘at fair value through profit or loss’.

The Group continues to hold 300,000 shares in London Stock Exchange Group Plc.

The change in the Group’s holdings of investment securities in the year may be summarised as follows:

At 1 January 2010
Additions
Disposals (sales and redemption)
Gain from changes in fair value

At 1 January 2011
Additions
Disposals (sales and redemption)
Loss from changes in fair value

At 31 December 2011

Available for sale 
£’000

86,932
480,500
(525,000)
155

42,587
455,110
(429,000)
(134)

68,563

Held to maturity 
£’000

694,000
1,679,090
(1,622,005)
–

751,085
1,565,418
(1,472,520)
–

Total 
£’000

780,932
2,159,590
(2,147,005)
155

793,672
2,020,528
(1,901,520)
(134)

843,983

912,546

86	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

	
	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

16 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

Trust work in progress
Prepayments
Accrued income

17 

Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 1 January 2010
Additions
Disposals

At 1 January 2011
Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2011

Depreciation
At 1 January 2010
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 1 January 2011
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2011

Carrying amount at 31 December 2011

Carrying amount at 31 December 2010

Carrying amount at 1 January 2010

2011 
£’000

961
8,952
28,500

38,413

Plant and 
equipment 
£’000

13,864
1,898
(3,990)

11,772
1,736
(1,076)

12,432

11,546
1,460
(3,899)

9,107
1,478
(1,052)

9,533

2,899

2,665

2,318

2010 
£’000

698
10,606
25,064

36,368

Total 
£’000

20,904
2,765
(4,090)

19,579
6,925
(1,076)

25,428

15,228
2,207
(3,999)

13,436
2,384
(1,052)

14,768

10,660

6,143

5,676

Short term 
leasehold 
improvements 
£’000

7,040
867
(100)

7,807
5,189
–

12,996

3,682
747
(100)

4,329
906
–

5,235

7,761

3,478

3,358

 Short term leasehold improvements include additions totalling £4,815,000 in relation to the relocation of our London head 
office from New Bond Street to 1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5FB.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

87

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

18  Net deferred tax asset

Deferred income taxes are calculated on all temporary differences under the liability method using an effective tax rate of 
25.0% (2010: 27.0%).

The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 January
Adjustments in respect of prior years:
– credited to profit or loss
– (charged)/credited directly to equity
Other movements in deferred tax:
– amounts charged to profit or loss
– actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
– share-based payments
– fair value measurement of available for sale securities
Effect of change in corporation tax rate on deferred tax:
– charged to profit or loss
– charged to other comprehensive income
– charged directly to equity

Deferred tax assets

Excess of depreciation
Share-based payments
Staff related costs
Pensions
Deferred income

Deferred tax liabilities

Available for sale securities
Intangible assets
Staff related costs

The deferred tax charge in profit or loss comprises the following temporary differences:

Excess of depreciation
Share-based payments
Staff related costs
Pensions
Unremitted overseas earnings
Intangible assets
Other provisions

2011 
£’000

2,474

69
(106)

(1,162)
1,691
377
35

(57)
(155)
(32)

3,134

2011 
£’000

698
1,142
105
2,072
–

4,017

2011 
£’000

726
157
–

883

2011 
£’000

40
16
(632)
1,711
–
(57)
72

1,150

2010 
£’000

1,603

218
56

(421)
841
313
(43)

(46)
(29)
(18)

2,474

2010 
£’000

738
919
–
2,306
72

4,035

2010 
£’000

820
214
527

1,561

2010 
£’000

(100)
(269)
376
1,909
(269)
(1,514)
116

249

88	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

19 

Intangible assets

Goodwill
Other intangible assets

 Goodwill

Cost

2011 
£’000

47,241
45,603

92,844

2010 
£’000

47,241
44,461

91,702

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

At 1 January and 31 December

47,241

47,241

Accumulated impairment losses

At 1 January and 31 December

–

–

Carrying amount of goodwill at 1 January and 31 December

47,241

47,241

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, at acquisition, to the cash generating units (CGUs) that are  
expected to benefit from that business combination. The carrying amount of goodwill has been allocated as follows:

Investment management
Trust and tax

2011 
£’000

45,287
1,954

47,241

2010 
£’000

45,287
1,954

47,241

The recoverable amounts of goodwill allocated to the CGUs are determined from value-in-use calculations. The key 
assumptions for the value-in-use calculations are those regarding the discount rates and growth rates. Management estimates 
discount rates using pre-tax rates that reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific  
to the CGUs. The growth rates are based on industry growth forecasts.

The Group prepares cash flow forecasts derived from the most recent financial budgets approved by management,  
covering the forthcoming year based on flat market assumptions and organic growth in line with historical rates. Budgets  
are extrapolated for up to ten years based on a medium to long term growth rate of 3% for the investment management  
CGU and 2% for the trust and tax CGU based on management’s expectation of future industry growth rates. A ten year 
extrapolation period is chosen based on management’s expectation of the duration of client relationships.

The pre-tax rate used to discount the forecast cash flows is 10% for investment management and 12% for trust and  
tax (2010: 10% and 12% respectively), based on a risk-adjusted weighted average cost of capital. Management judge these  
discount rates to appropriately reflect the markets in which the CGUs operate and, in particular, the relatively small size  
of the trust and tax CGU.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

89

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

19	

Intangible	assets	continued

Other	intangible	assets

Cost
At 1 January 2010
Internally developed in the year
Purchased in the year
Disposals

At 1 January 2011
Internally developed in the year
Purchased in the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2011

Amortisation
At 1 January 2010
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 1 January 2011
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2011

Carrying amount at 31 December 2011

Carrying amount at 31 December 2010

Carrying amount at 1 January 2010

Client 
relationships 
£’000

Software 
development 
costs 
£’000

36,298
–
14,293
(878)

49,713
–
5,692
(1,072)

54,333

4,758
4,845
(878)

8,725
5,134
(1,072)

12,787

41,546

40,988

31,540

2,236
284
–
–

2,520
340
–
–

2,860

1,425
355
–

1,780
357
–

2,137

723

740

811

Purchased 
software 
£’000

11,757
–
1,350
(639)

12,468
–
1,723
–

14,191

9,376
998
(639)

9,735
1,122
–

10,857

3,334

2,733

2,381

Total 
£’000

50,291
284
15,643
(1,517)

64,701
340
7,415
(1,072)

71,384

15,559
6,198
(1,517)

20,240
6,613
(1,072)

25,781

45,603

44,461

34,732

Purchases of acquired client relationships relate to payments made to investment managers and third parties for the  
introduction of client relationships, net of adjustments to consideration payments of £804,000 (2010: £nil). The amortisation 
charge for acquired client relationships has been reduced by £80,000 (2010: £nil) as a result of the adjustments to  
consideration payments.

Purchased software with a cost of £8,881,000 (2010: £7,957,000) has been fully amortised but is still in use.

20  Deposits by banks

On 31 December 2011, deposits by banks included overnight cash book overdraft balances of £513,000 (2010: £215,000). 
Included within deposits by banks at 31 December 2010 is an unsecured term loan of £3,089,000. The final instalment of  
this loan was paid in April 2011.

The fair value of deposits by banks was not materially different to the carrying value. Fair value has been calculated as the 
discounted amount of estimated future cash flows expected to be paid using current market rates.

90	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

21  Due to customers

Repayable:
– on demand or at short notice
– 3 months or less excluding on demand or at short notice
– 1 year or less but over 3 months

Amounts include:
– variable interest rates
– fixed interest rates
– non-interest bearing

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

866,427
41,879
350

908,656

862,285
40,437
5,934

908,656

718,168
43,335
523

762,026

712,260
44,288
5,478

762,026

The fair value of amounts due to customers was not materially different to their carrying value. The estimated fair value of 
deposits with no stated maturity, which include non-interest bearing deposits, is the amount repayable on demand. The 
estimated fair value of fixed interest bearing deposits is based on discounted cash flows using interest rates for new debts  
with similar remaining maturity.

22  Accruals, deferred income, provisions and other liabilities

Creditors
Accruals and deferred income
Other provisions (note 23)

23  Other provisions

At 1 January 2010

Charged to profit or loss
Unused amount credited to profit or loss

Net charge to profit or loss
Other movements
Utilised/paid during the period

At 1 January 2011

Charged to profit or loss
Unused amount credited to profit or loss

Net charge to profit or loss
Other movements
Utilised/paid during the period

At 31 December 2011

2011 
£’000

13,128
27,787
10,009

50,924

Deferred,  
contingent 
costs to acquire  
client relationship 
intangibles 
£’000

16,817

–
–

–
14,293
(26,018)

5,092

–
–

–
5,692
(3,988)

6,796

Client
compensation 
£’000

Property related 
and other 
£’000

801

530
(466)

64
–
(243)

622

1,245
(10)

1,235
–
(191)

1,666

131

508
–

508
–
(163)

476

1,636
(406)

1,230
–
(159)

1,547

2010 
£’000

11,182
25,083
6,190

42,455

Total 
£’000

17,749

1,038
(466)

572
14,293
(26,424)

6,190

2,881
(416)

2,465
5,692
(4,338)

10,009

Other movements in provisions relate to deferred payments to investment managers and third parties for the introduction of 
client relationships, which have been capitalised and include £nil (2010: £9,844,000) in relation to the agreement to acquire 
certain discretionary investment management activities from Lloyds Banking Group plc.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

91

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

23	 Other	provisions	continued

During the ordinary course of business the Group may be subject to complaints, threatened and actual legal proceedings 
(which may include lawsuits brought on behalf of clients or other third parties) both in the UK and overseas. Any such 
material matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisors where appropriate, 
to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely 
than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established to management’s best estimate of the amount required 
to settle the obligation at the relevant balance sheet date. The timing of settlement of provisions for client compensation 
or litigation is dependent, in part, on the duration of negotiations with third parties.

Property related and other provisions include £920,000 (2010: £nil) in relation to dilapidation costs and £276,000 
(2010: £nil) of onerous lease costs arising from the relocation of the current head office premises from New Bond Street to  
1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5FB (note 8).

The non-current element of provisions totals £5,745,000 as at 31 December 2011 (2010: £3,158,000). Non-current 
provisions are expected to be settled within 24 months of the balance sheet date.

24 

Long term employee benefits

The Group operates a defined contribution group personal pension scheme and contributes to various other personal 
pension arrangements for certain directors and employees. The total of contributions made to this scheme during the year 
was £1,750,000 (2010: £1,295,000). The Group also operates a defined contribution scheme for overseas employees, for 
which the total contributions were £21,000 (2010: £21,000).

The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes; the Rathbone 1987 Scheme and the Laurence Keen Scheme. 
The schemes are currently both clients of Rathbone Investment Management, with investments managed on a discretionary  
basis, in accordance with the statements of investment principles agreed by the trustees. Scheme assets are held separately 
from those of the Group.

The trustees of the schemes are required to act in the best interest of the schemes’ beneficiaries. The appointment of trustees 
is determined by the schemes’ trust documentation and legislation. The Group has a policy that one third of all trustees 
should be nominated by members of the schemes.

The Laurence Keen Scheme was closed to new entrants and future accrual with effect from 30 September 1999. Past service 
benefits continue to be calculated by reference to final pensionable salaries. From 1 October 1999, all the active members 
of the Laurence Keen Scheme were included under the Rathbone 1987 Scheme for accrual of retirement benefits for further 
service. The Rathbone 1987 Scheme was closed to new entrants with effect from 31 March 2002.

The Group provides death in service benefits to all employees through the Rathbone 1987 Scheme. Third party insurance 
is purchased for the benefits where possible and £539,000 of related insurance premiums were expensed to profit or loss in 
the year (2010: £519,000). The estimated present value of the uninsured death in service benefits is included in long term 
employee benefits liabilities. 

The schemes are valued by independent actuaries at least every three years using the projected unit credit method, which 
looks at the value of benefits accruing over the years following the valuation date based on projected salary to the date of 
termination of services, discounted to a present value using a rate that reflects the characteristics of the liability. The 
valuations are updated at each balance sheet date in between full valuations. The latest full actuarial valuations were carried 
out as at the following dates:

Rathbone 1987 Scheme
Laurence Keen Scheme

31 December 2010
31 December 2010

92	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

24	 Long	term	employee	benefits	continued

The assumptions used by the actuaries, in preparing this note, are the best estimates chosen from a range of possible actuarial 
assumptions which, due to the timescale covered by the liability, may not necessarily be borne out in practice. The principal 
actuarial assumptions used, which reflect the different membership profiles of the schemes, were:

Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase of pensions in payment
Rate of increase of deferred pensions
Discount rate
Expected return on scheme assets
Inflation*

*  Inflation assumptions are based on the Retail Prices Index

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme %

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme %

2011 
Rathbone 1987 
Scheme %

2010 
Rathbone 1987 
Scheme %

4.10
3.40
3.10
4.70
4.60
3.10

4.85
3.70
3.60
5.40
5.90
3.60

4.10
3.10
3.10
4.70
5.00
3.10

4.85
3.50
3.60
5.40
6.70
3.60

The assumed duration of the liabilities for the Laurence Keen Scheme is 18 years (2010: 18 years) and the assumed duration 
for the Rathbone 1987 Scheme is 24 years (2010: 24 years). The overall expected return on scheme assets is a weighted 
average of the returns expected on each class of asset held by the scheme, as disclosed below.

The normal retirement age for members of the Laurence Keen Scheme is 65 (60 for certain former directors). The normal 
retirement age for members of the Rathbone 1987 Scheme is 60 for service prior to 1 July 2009 and 65 from that date 
onwards, following the introduction of pension benefits based on Career Average Revalued Earnings (CARE) from that date. 
The assumed life expectancy for the membership of both schemes is based on the S1NA actuarial tables. The assumed life 
expectations on retirement were:

Retiring today:

Retiring in 20 years:

– aged 60
– aged 65
– aged 60
– aged 65

2011 
Males

28.7
23.8
31.2
26.1

2011 
Females

30.8
25.9
32.9
27.9

2010 
Males

26.9
22.1
28.6
23.7

2010 
Females

29.1
24.3
30.4
25.4

The amount included in the balance sheet arising from the Group’s obligations in respect of the schemes is as follows:

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme assets

(13,421) (103,113) (116,534)
96,292 109,194
12,902

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2011 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

2011 
Total  
£’000

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2010 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

2010 
Total  
£’000

(12,041)
11,951

(89,312) (101,353)
94,710
82,759

Total deficit

(519)

(6,821)

(7,340)

(90)

(6,553)

(6,643)

The amounts recognised in profit or loss, within operating expenses, are as follows:

Current service cost
Interest cost
Expected return on scheme assets

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2011 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

–
642
(718)

2,479
4,843
(5,762)

2011 
Total  
£’000

2,479
5,485
(6,480)

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2010 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

–
623
(631)

2,129
4,374
(4,985 )

2010 
Total  
£’000

2,129
4,997
(5,616)

(76)

1,560

1,484

(8)

1,518

1,510

Actuarial gains and losses have been reported in other comprehensive income. The actual return on scheme assets was a 
rise in value of £500,000 (2010: £1,206,000 rise) for the Laurence Keen Scheme and a rise in value of £8,844,000 
(2010: £9,084,000 rise) for the Rathbone 1987 Scheme.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

93

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

24	 Long	term	employee	benefits	continued

The cumulative actuarial gains and losses reported in other comprehensive income since the adoption of IFRS is as follows:

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2011 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

2011 
Total  
£’000

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2010 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

2010 
Total  
£’000

At 1 January
Net actuarial loss recognised in year

(472)
(1,261)

(10,487)
(5,122)

(10,959)
(6,383)

(405)
(67)

(7,549)
(2,938)

(7,954)
(3,005)

At 31 December

(1,733)

(15,609)

(17,342)

(472)

(10,487)

(10,959)

Movements in the present value of defined benefit obligations were as follows:

At 1 January
Service cost (employer’s part)
Interest cost
Contributions from members
Actuarial loss
Benefits paid

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2011 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

2011 
Total  
£’000

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2010 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

12,041
–
642
–
1,043
(305)

89,312 101,353
2,479
5,485
1,283
9,247
(3,313)

2,479
4,843
1,283
8,204
(3,008)

11,086
–
623
–
642
(310)

75,581
2,129
4,374
1,245
7,037
(1,054)

2010 
Total  
£’000

86,667
2,129
4,997
1,245
7,679
(1,364)

At 31 December

13,421 103,113 116,534

12,041

89,312 101,353

Movements in the fair value of scheme assets were as follows:

At 1 January
Expected return on scheme assets
Actuarial (losses)/gains
Contributions from the sponsoring companies
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid

2011 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2011 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

11,951
718
(218)
756
–
(305)

82,759
5,762
3,082
6,414
1,283
(3,008)

2011 
Total  
£’000

94,710
6,480
2,864
7,170
1,283
(3,313)

2010 
Laurence Keen 
Scheme 
£’000

2010 
Rathbone  
1987 Scheme  
£’000

10,299
631
575
756
–
(310)

66,955
4,985
4,099
6,529
1,245
(1,054)

2010 
Total  
£’000

77,254
5,616
4,674
7,285
1,245
(1,364)

At 31 December

12,902

96,292 109,194

11,951

82,759

94,710

The analysis of the scheme assets, measured at bid prices, and expected rates of return on those assets at the balance  
sheet date was as follows:

Laurence Keen Scheme

Equity instruments
Debt instruments
Cash

At 31 December

Rathbone 1987 Scheme

Equity instruments
Debt instruments
Interest rate swap funds
Cash

At 31 December

1.1.11 
Expected 
return 
%

1.1.10 
Expected 
return 
%

6.05
3.40
0.50

7.45
4.60
0.50

2011 
Fair 
value  
£’000

6,198
6,208
496

2010 
Fair 
value  
£’000

2011 
Current 
allocation 
%

2010 
Current 
allocation 
%

6,082
5,538
331

48
48
4

51
46
3

12,902

11,951

1.1.11 
Expected 
return 
%

1.1.10 
Expected 
return 
%

6.05
3.25
2.80
0.50

7.45
4.60
4.20
0.50

2011 
Fair 
value  
£’000

63,504
21,791
8,707
2,290

2010 
Fair 
value  
£’000

2011 
Current 
allocation 
%

2010 
Current 
allocation 
%

64,971
11,928
4,512
1,348

66
23
9
2

79
14
5
2

96,292

82,759

94	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

	
	
	
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

24	 Long	term	employee	benefits	continued

At 31 December 2011 the Rathbone 1987 Scheme held 335 shares (2010: 335) with a nominal value of £8,417,000  
(2010: £4,808,000) in an interest rate swap fund. The fund is invested in long-dated interest rate swaps, the duration of  
which is intended to broadly align with the duration of the scheme’s liabilities.

The expected return on equities is assumed to be 3.25% above the return on long-dated gilts (2010: 3.25% above). The  
expected rate of return on debt instruments is based on long term yields at the start of the year. Cash has been assumed to  
generate a similar return to the Bank of England base rate.

The statements of investment principles set by the trustees require that the assets of the schemes are invested in a balanced  
portfolio in the following asset classes and proportions:

UK equities
Overseas equities
Fixed interest stocks
Cash deposits

Laurence Keen Scheme

Rathbone 1987 Scheme

35% – 55%
0% – 20%
45% – 65%*
45% – 65%*

43% – 57%
21% – 35%
14% – 28%
0% – 8%

*  The total allocation of assets in the Laurence Keen Scheme to fixed interest stocks and cash deposits is expressed as a combined percentage of the two asset  
  classes in the statement of investment principles

In the Rathbone 1987 Scheme, not more than 80% of the assets may be held in equities. A maximum of 5% of UK equities  
may be invested in companies outside the FTSE 350 and not more than 5% of the total portfolio can be invested in hedge  
funds. The trustees have initiated a process of de-risking the portfolio over the next 10 years as the scheme matures by 
switching a proportion of the scheme’s assets into ‘lower risk’ asset classes on the occurrence of a series of time-based and/or 
market-based trigger events.

In the Laurence Keen Scheme, not more than 55% of the assets may be held in equities. A maximum of 15% of UK equities 
may be invested in companies outside the FTSE 350 and not more than 15% of the assets may be held in alternative assets.

The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions used to measure the total of the two schemes’ liabilities are set out below:

0.5% increase in:
– discount rate
– rate of inflation
– rate of salary growth
1 year increase to longevity at 60

The history of experience adjustments is as follows:

Laurence Keen Scheme

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme assets

Deficit in the scheme

Experience adjustments on scheme liabilities:
– amount
– percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustments on scheme assets:
– amount
– percentage of scheme assets

Combined impact on schemes’ liabilities

(Decrease)/increase 
£’000

(Decrease)/increase 
%

(13,567)
8,602
4,310
3,242

(11.6)
7.4
3.7
2.8

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

2009 
£’000

2008 
£’000

2007 
£’000

(13,421)
12,902

(12,041)
11,951

(11,086)
10,299

(9,750)
8,760

(10,301)
9,708

(519)

(90)

(787)

(990)

(593)

474
4%

218
2%

–
–

575
5%

395
4%

940
9%

(248)
(3%)

(104)
(1%)

(1,715)
(20%)

70
1%

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

95

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

24	 Long	term	employee	benefits	continued

Rathbone 1987 Scheme

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme assets

Deficit in the scheme

Experience adjustments on scheme liabilities:
– amount
– percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustments on scheme assets:
– amount
– percentage of scheme assets

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

2009 
£’000

2008 
£’000

2007 
£’000

(103,113)
96,292

(89,312)
82,759

(75,581)
66,955

(55,284)
50,551

(60,274)
54,415

(6,821)

(6,553)

(8,626)

(4,733)

(5,859)

4,338
4%

(635)
(1%)

305
–

2,937
5%

(1,264)
(2%)

3,082
3%

4,099
5%

6,314
9%

(10,677)
(21%)

(90)
–

The total regular contributions made by the Group to the Rathbone 1987 Scheme during the year were £3,664,000  
(2010: £3,571,000) based on 22.6% of pensionable salaries (2010: 22.6%). Additional lump sum contributions of  
£2,750,000 were paid in 2011 (2010: £2,958,000). Following the recent triennial valuation, the Group’s regular contributions 
will fall to 14.8% of pensionable salaries and the Group has committed to make additional annual contributions to the  
scheme of £2,750,000 until 30 June 2017. With effect from 31 March 2002 the Rathbone 1987 Scheme was closed to new 
entrants and, consequently, the current pension cost will increase as the members of the scheme approach retirement.

The total contributions made by the Group to the Laurence Keen Scheme during the year were £756,000 (2010: £756,000). 
Annual contributions of £756,000 will continue to be made to the Laurence Keen Scheme until April 2013. Thereafter, annual 
contributions of £336,000 will be made until December 2017. As the scheme was closed to new entrants with effect from 
1 October 1999, the current pension cost will increase as the members of the scheme approach retirement.

25 

Share capital and share premium

The following movements in share capital occurred during the year:

At 1 January 2010
Shares issued:
– to Share Incentive Plan
– to Save As You Earn scheme
– on exercise of options

At 1 January 2011
Shares issued:
– to Share Incentive Plan
– to Save As You Earn scheme
– on exercise of options

Number of  
shares

43,296,330

68,851
359
11,250

43,376,790

Exercise 
price 
pence

Share 
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
£’000

Total 
£’000

2,165

31,756

33,921

926.5
696.0
852.0

3
–
1

635
2
95

638
2
96

2,169

32,488

34,657

147,229
1,288
35,833

890.0 – 1,117.0
696.0
415.0 – 852.0

7
–
2

1,451
9
268

1,458
9
270

At 31 December 2011

43,561,140

2,178

34,216

36,394

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time, and are entitled to one vote  
per share at meetings of the Company. The ordinary shareholders are entitled to any residual assets on the winding up of 
the Company.

96	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

26 

Treasury shares

The following movements in treasury shares occurred during the year:

At 1 January 2010
Acquired in the year
Released on vesting

At 1 January 2011
Acquired in the year
Released on vesting

At 31 December 2011

Number of 
shares

383,831
62,449
(135,995 )

310,285
285,728
(120,559)

475,454

£’000

4,032
569
(1,702)

2,899
2,955
(1,125)

4,729

Treasury shares represent the cost of the Company’s own shares, either purchased in the market or issued by the Company, 
that are held by the Company or in an employee benefit trust to satisfy future awards under the Group’s share-based  
payment schemes (note 27). The number of ordinary shares held by the Company outside the employee benefit trust was  
50,000 (2010: nil) and the number of shares held by Investec Trust (Jersey) Limited at 31 December 2011 was 106,604  
(2010: 42,693).

27 

Share-based payments

Share	Incentive	Plan

The Group operates a Share Incentive Plan (SIP), which is available to all employees. Employees can contribute up to 
£125 per month to acquire shares which are purchased or allotted twice a year at the end of six-month accumulation periods. 
The Group currently matches employee contributions on a one-for-one basis to acquire matching shares.

The Group also provides performance-related free shares, with eligible employees receiving shares valued at the rate of 
£100 per 1% real increase in EPS up to a maximum of £3,000 per annum.

For UK employees, SIP dividends are reinvested and used to purchase dividend shares (up to £1,500 in any tax year), whilst 
for Jersey employees dividends are paid in cash.

As at 31 December 2011, the trustees of the SIP held 1,394,076 (2010: 1,316,557) ordinary shares of 5p each in Rathbone 
Brothers Plc with a total market value of £14,777,000 (2010: £14,403,000). No dividends on these shares have been waived. 
Of the total number of shares held by the trustees, 310,426 (2010: 267,592) have been conditionally gifted to employees and 
8,424 (2010: nil) remain unallocated.

Long	Term	Incentive	Plan

Details of the general terms of this plan are set out in the remuneration report on page 53. The total shareholder return 
based performance criteria have been treated as market-based vesting conditions. Shares for plan awards are provided by 
market purchase, treasury shares or from the Rathbone Brothers Plc Settlement.

Historically, the Group has elected to settle substantially all of the LTIP awards in cash as an alternative to shares. As a 
consequence of this, the Group treats awards under the LTIP as cash-settled rather than equity-settled. At the year end, a 
liability of £1,175,000 (2010: £795,000) has been recognised for the estimated fair value of future awards.

At 31 December 2011, the trustees held 106,604 (2010: 112,693) ordinary shares of 5p each in Rathbone Brothers Plc with 
a total market value of £1,130,000 (2010: £1,233,000). Dividends on these shares have been waived by the trustees.

Executive	profit	share

Details of the terms of the executive profit share scheme are set out in the remuneration report on page 51. Shares for plan 
awards, all of which are yet to vest, will be provided by market purchase or treasury shares.

Savings	related	share	option	or	Save	As	You	Earn	(SAYE)	plan

Under the SAYE plan, employees can contribute up to £250 per month to acquire shares at the end of a three or five year 
savings period. Further information on the scheme is given in the remuneration report on page 55.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

97

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

27	 Share-based	payments	continued

Savings related share option or Save As You Earn (SAYE) plan	continued

Options with an aggregate estimated fair value of £185,000, determined using a binomial valuation model including expected 
dividends, were granted on 29 March 2011 to directors and staff under the SAYE plan. The inputs into the binomial model 
for options granted during 2011, as at the date of issue, were as follows:

Share price (pence)
Exercise price (pence)
Expected volatility
Risk-free rate
Expected dividend yield

2011

1,196
934
32%
2.4%
3.7%

2010

–
–
–
–
–

The number of share options outstanding for the SAYE plan at the end of the year, the period in which they were granted and 
the date on which they may be exercised are given below:

Year of grant

2009
2011

Share	option	scheme

Exercise price 
pence

Exercise 
period

2011 
Number  
of share 
options

2010 
Number 
of share 
options

696.0
934.0

2014 and 2016

2013 179,151 184,988
54,053
–

Under the share option scheme approved by shareholders in 2000, certain employees hold options to subscribe for shares in the 
Company at prices ranging from 415p to 1,172p. Options are conditional on the employee completing three years’ service (the 
vesting period) and are exercisable three years from grant date. The options have a contractual option term of seven years from 
the date they become exercisable. The Group has no legal or constructive obligation to repurchase or settle the options in cash.

The number of share options outstanding for the share option scheme at the end of the year, the periods in which they were 
granted and the periods in which they may be exercised are given below:

Year of grant

2001
2001
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2006
2008

Exercisable

Exercise price 
pence

985.0
827.5
915.8
810.0
415.0
743.5
852.0
1,172.0
1,116.0
813.5

Exercise 
period

2011 
Number  
of share 
options

2010 
Number 
of share 
options

–
–
–
64,851
1,500
59,698

22,500
2004–2011
66,184
2004–2011
38,110
2004–2011
64,851
2005–2012
9,622
2006–2013
61,956
2007–2014
2008–2015 116,187 144,648
15,948
2009–2016
10,000
2009–2016
30,000
2011–2018

–
–
–

242,236 463,819

Movements in the number of share options outstanding for both the SAYE plan and the share option scheme were as follows:

At 1 January
Granted in the year
Lapsed in the year
Exercised in the year

At 31 December

2011 
Number 
of share 
options

648,807
54,964
(35,833)
(192,498)

475,440

2011 
Weighted average 
exercise price 
pence

802.0
934.0
753.0
900.0

782.0

2010 
Number  
of share 
options

777,214
–
(116,798)
(11,609)

648,807

2010 
Weighted average 
exercise price 
pence

819.0
–
911.0
847.0

802.0

The weighted average share price at the dates of exercise for share options exercised during the year was £11.91  
(2010: £10.04). The options outstanding at 31 December 2011 had a weighted average contractual life of 2.1 years 
(2010: 3.5 years). Options exercisable at 31 December 2011 had a weighted average exercise price of £7.82 (2010: £7.71).

The Group recognised total expenses of £2,604,000 in relation to share-based payment transactions in 2011 (2010: £1,729,000).

98	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28 

Financial risk management

The Group has identified the risks arising from its activities and has established policies and procedures to manage these items 
in accordance with its risk appetite, as described in the risk management report on page 23. The Group categorises its financial 
risks into three areas:

(i)  credit risk (which includes counterparty default risk);

(ii)  liquidity risk; and

(iii) market risk (which includes fair value interest rate risk, cash flow interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk and price risk).

The sections below outline the Group’s risk appetite and explain how it defines and manages each category of financial risk. 
The Group’s risk management policies are designed to identify and analyse the risks that the Group faces, to set appropriate  
risk limits and controls and to monitor the risks and adherence to limits by means of reliable and up-to-date information sys-
tems. The Group regularly reviews its risk management policies and systems to reflect changes in the business,  
counterparties, markets and the range of financial instruments that it utilises.

The Group’s overall strategy and policies for monitoring and management of financial risk are set by the Board of directors  
(‘the Board’). The Board has embedded risk management within the business through the boards of directors of the Group’s 
operating subsidiaries and certain of the Board’s standing committees. The risk management committee has primary 
responsibility for co-ordinating and overseeing the identification, mitigation and management of risks as described in the risk 
management report.

The treasury department, reporting through the banking committee, has principal responsibility for monitoring exposure to 
credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk. Procedures and delegated authorities are documented in a Group treasury manual 
and policy documents are in place to cover the management and monitoring of each type of risk. The primary objective of the 
Group’s treasury policy is to manage short term liquidity requirements whilst maintaining an appropriate level of exposure to 
other financial risks in accordance with the Group’s risk appetite.

Eurozone	credit	crisis

During the second half of 2011, concerns have grown about the strength and stability of certain eurozone economies, in 
particular whether the Greek, Italian or Spanish governments would default on their debt. This, in turn, increased speculation 
on the future of the Euro and whether the more heavily indebted countries would continue to participate in it.

A break-up of the Euro, should it occur, is likely to result in a protracted recession in the Euro area and wider disruption to 
global financial markets. Such an event would be expected to have an adverse effect on the Group’s trading conditions. This 
might include falls in the values of financial assets, the potential loss of capital and liquidity through counterparty defaults 
and further reductions in interest rate margins.

The Group’s treasury portfolio is well diversified and invests in certificates of deposit with a number of European banks. At 
31 December 2011, the Group had no direct exposure to eurozone sovereign entities (2010: none). The controls around the 
treasury portfolio are set out below. The banking committee has been particularly active this year in assessing the expected 
impact of the eurozone issues. As a result, during the year it has moved increasing amounts of money into UK treasury bills.  
By the end of the year these totalled some 9.6% of the total treasury assets of £909,593,000, of which all were rated Fitch 
single A or above. The duration of these assets is set out in the table on page 106.

(i)	

Credit	risk

The Group takes on exposure to credit risk, which is the risk that a counterparty will be unable to pay amounts in full when 
due, through its banking, treasury, trust and pensions advisory activities. The principal source of credit risk arises from 
placing funds with other banks and holding interest-bearing securities. The Group also has exposure to credit risk through 
its loan books, guarantees given on clients’ behalf and loans made to the acquirers of the Group’s Jersey and Switzerland 
operations in 2008 and 2009.

It is the Group’s policy to place funds generated internally and from deposits by clients with a range of high-quality financial 
institutions. Investments are spread to avoid excessive exposure to any individual counterparty. Loans made to clients are 
secured against clients’ assets that are held and managed by Group companies.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

99

	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

Exposure to credit risk is managed through setting appropriate ratings requirements and lending limits. Limits are reviewed 
regularly, taking into account the ability of borrowers and potential borrowers to meet repayment obligations.

The Group categorises its exposures based on the long term ratings awarded to counterparties by Fitch Ratings Ltd (‘Fitch’) 
or Moody’s Corporation (‘Moody’s’). Each exposure is assessed individually, both at inception and in ongoing monitoring. 
In addition to formal external ratings, the banking committee also utilises market intelligence information to assist its  
ongoing monitoring.

Settlement balances 
Settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash or transfer of a security is made in the expectation of a 
corresponding delivery of a security or receipt of cash. The majority of transactions are carried out on a delivery versus 
payment basis, which results in securities and cash being exchanged within a very close timeframe. Settlement balances 
outside standard terms are monitored on a daily basis.

The Investment Management and Unit Trust businesses have exposure to market counterparties in the settlement of trades. 
Settlement balances arising in the Investment Management segment are primarily in relation to client trades and risk of 
non-settlement is borne by clients.

Loans and advances to banks and debt and other securities 
The Group has exposures to a wide range of financial institutions through its treasury portfolio, which includes bank deposits, 
certificates of deposit, money market funds and government bonds. These exposures principally arise from the placement of 
surplus investment management client cash, which is held under a banking relationship, and the Group’s own reserves.

The Group’s policy requires that all such exposures are only taken with counterparties that have been awarded a minimum 
long term rating of A by Fitch or equivalent rating by Moody’s. Counterparty limits are also in place to limit exposure to an 
individual counterparty or connected group of counterparties. Counterparty exposures are monitored on a daily basis by the 
treasury department and reviewed by the banking committee on a monthly basis, or more frequently when necessary. The 
banking committee may suspend dealing in a particular counterparty, or liquidate specific holdings, in the light of adverse 
market information.

Loans and advances to customers 
The Group provides loans to clients through its investment management operations (the investment management loan book). 
The Group is also exposed to credit risk on trade debtors arising from the trust, tax and pensions advisory businesses (trust 
and pension debtors).

(a)	 Overdrafts	

Overdrafts on clients’ investment management accounts arise from time to time due to short term timing differences 
between the purchase and sale of assets on a client’s behalf. Overdrafts are actively monitored and reported to the  
banking committee on a monthly basis.

(b)	 Investment	management	loan	book	

Loans and short term overdrafts are provided as a service to investment management clients who are generally asset  
rich but have short to medium term cash requirements. Such loans are normally made on a fully secured basis against 
portfolios held in Rathbones’ nominee name and are advanced for a maximum of one year. Extensions to the initial loan 
period may be granted subject to credit criteria.

  The banking committee reviews all loans on a monthly basis and approves all loan extensions. Where necessary,  

repayment plans are established with clients before loans become overdue or uncovered.

  At 31 December 2011, the total lending exposure limit for the investment management loan book was £60,000,000 
(2010: £45,000,000), of which £36,434,000 had been advanced (2010: £31,957,000) and a further £6,925,000 had  
been committed (2010: £7,724,000).

(c)	Trust	and	pension	debtors	

Trust and pension debtors relate to fees which have been invoiced but not yet settled by clients. The collection and  
ageing of trust and pension debtors are reviewed on a monthly basis by the management committees of the Group’s  
trust and pension advisory companies. Impairment provisions are made for any debts which are considered to be  
doubtful for collection.

100	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

(d)	Other	debtors	

Other loans and advances to customers are constituted by loans made to the acquirers of the Group’s Jersey trust  
operations in 2008, and its Switzerland trust operations in 2009, and other loans (note 14). Such debts do not usually  
arise within the course of the Group’s day to day operations and therefore they are not subject to formalised  
standard lending criteria. 

Impairment and provisioning policies 
Impairment provisions are recognised for financial reporting purposes only for losses that have been incurred at the  
balance sheet date, based on objective evidence of impairment.

All credit exposures are reviewed individually, at least annually, or more regularly when individual circumstances require. 
Impairment allowances on credit exposures are determined by an evaluation of the incurred loss at the balance sheet date 
on a case by case basis. The assessment considers, where applicable, the value of any collateral held, any changes to the  
external credit rating and the anticipated receipts for each individual exposure.

Impairment provisions for credit risk, which relate solely to trust and pension debtors, are set out in note 14. No other 
impairment losses arose during the year (2010: none).

Maximum exposure to credit risk

Credit risk relating to on-balance sheet exposures:
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers:
– overdrafts
– investment management loan book
– trust and pension debtors
– other debtors
Debt securities:
– unlisted debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets
Credit risk relating to off-balance sheet exposures:
Loan commitments
Financial guarantees

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

13,443
65,008

4,887
36,434
852
7,463

909,593
31,155

6,925
578

18,169
39,565

3,306
31,957
1,073
5,822

790,585
30,265

7,724
583

1,076,338

929,049

The above table represents the gross credit risk exposure to the Group at 31 December 2011 and 2010, without taking 
account of any collateral held or other credit enhancements attached. For on-balance sheet assets, the exposures set out above 
are based on net carrying amounts as reported in the balance sheet.

10.7% of the total maximum exposure is derived from loans and advances to banks and customers (2010: 8.8%) and  
84.5% represents investments in debt securities (2010: 85.1%).

Settlement balances 
Settlement balances are summarised as follows:

Neither past due nor impaired
Past due but not impaired < 90 days
Past due but not impaired > 90 days

Carrying value

2011 
£’000

11,812
1,615
16

13,443

2010 
£’000

13,267
4,877
25

18,169

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

101

	
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

Loans and advances 
Loans and advances are summarised as follows:

Neither past due nor impaired
Past due but not impaired
Impaired

Gross carrying value
Less: allowance for impairment (note 14)

Net carrying value

2011 
Loans and 
advances 
to banks 
£’000

65,008
–
–

65,008
–

65,008

2011 
Loans and 
advances 
to customers 
£’000

47,255
504
138

47,897
(110)

47,787

2010 
Loans and 
advances 
to banks 
£’000

39,565
–
–

39,565
–

39,565

2010 
Loans and 
advances 
to customers 
£’000

39,318
708
143

40,169
(143)

40,026

No loans and advances have been renegotiated (2010: none).

(a)	 Neither	past	due	nor	impaired	

The credit quality of loans and advances to customers that were neither past due nor impaired at 31 December 2011,  
which are all externally unrated, is analysed below between those loans that are subject to standard lending criteria,  
which are described on page 100, and those loans for which there are no standard criteria. All loans initially made subject  
to standard lending criteria remained within those criteria at 31 December 2011 (2010: all loans). An exposure is  
reported as past due when the contractual due date for settlement has passed and the balance has not been repaid,  
except in the case of trust and pension debtors, where a normal settlement period of up to 30 days is expected.

At 31 December 2011

Standard lending criteria
Not subject to standard lending criteria

At 31 December 2010

Standard lending criteria
Not subject to standard lending criteria

Investment 
management 
loan book 
£’000

Trust and 
pension 
debtors 
£’000

Overdrafts 
£’000

4,887
–

36,434
–

4,887

36,434

Investment 
management 
loan book 
£’000

31,957
–

Overdrafts 
£’000

3,306
–

3,306

31,957

210
–

210

Trust and 
pension 
debtors 
£’000

223
–

223

Total 
loans and 
advances to 
customers 
£’000

41,531
5,724

Other 
debtors 
£’000

–
5,724

5,724

47,255

Total 
loans and 
advances to 
customers 
£’000

35,486
3,832

Other 
debtors 
£’000

–
3,832

3,832

39,318

The credit quality of loans and advances to banks that were neither past due nor impaired at 31 December 2011 is 
analysed below by reference to the long term credit rating awarded by Fitch, or equivalent rating by Moody’s as at the 
balance sheet date.

AA– to AA+
A to A+

2011 
£’000

21,007
44,001

65,008

2010 
£’000

39,565
–

39,565

102	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

(b)	 Past	due	but	not	impaired	

Loans and advances that are past due are assessed for impairment and provided against where objective evidence of 
impairment exists. Trust and pension debtors may be outstanding for some time before collection, but this is not necessarily 
an indication that the debt will not ultimately be collected. The gross amounts of loans and advances to customers, by  
class, that were past due but not impaired at 31 December 2011 were:

At 31 December 2011

< 90 days overdue
90 – 180 days overdue
180 – 270 days overdue
270 – 365 days overdue
> 365 days overdue

At 31 December 2010

< 90 days overdue
90 – 180 days overdue
180 – 270 days overdue
270 – 365 days overdue
> 365 days overdue

Investment 
management 
loan book 
£’000

Trust and 
pension 
debtors 
£’000

Overdrafts 
£’000

Total 
loans and 
advances to 
customers 
£’000

Other 
debtors 
£’000

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

162
202
52
59
29

504

–
–
–
–
–

–

162
202
52
59
29

504

Investment 
management 
loan book 
£’000

Trust and 
pension 
debtors 
£’000

Overdrafts 
£’000

Total 
loans and 
advances to 
customers 
£’000

Other 
debtors 
£’000

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

255
141
184
43
85

708

–
–
–
–
–

–

255
141
184
43
85

708

(c)	 Impaired	

Allowance has been made for individually impaired trust and pension debtors. The balance of individually impaired  
trust and pension debtors is £138,000 (2010: £143,000). There were no other impaired credit exposures at  
31 December 2011 (2010: £nil).

Debt securities 
The table below presents an analysis of debt securities by rating agency designation, as at 31 December 2011, based on Fitch 
or Moody’s long term rating designation.

AAA
AA– to AA+
A– to A+

2011 
Government 
securities 
£’000

86,983
–
–

2011 
Money  
market 
funds 
£’000

2011 
Certificates 
of deposit 
£’000

2011 
Total 
£’000

2010 
Government 
securities 
£’000

2010 
Money  
market 
funds 
£’000

2010 
Certificates 
of deposit 
£’000

2010 
Total 
£’000

65,610

– 152,593
– 258,000 258,000
– 499,000 499,000

86,983

65,610

757,000 909,593

–
–
–

–

39,500

39,500
–
– 448,000 448,000
– 303,085 303,085

39,500 751,085 790,585

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

103

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

Concentration of credit risk 
The Group has counterparty concentration risk within its treasury assets in that exposure is to a number of similar credit 
institutions. The banking committee actively monitors counterparties and may reduce risk by either suspending dealing or 
liquidating investments in the light of adverse market information, for example in anticipation of or in response to any  
formal Fitch or Moody’s rating downgrade. This may happen in relation to specific banks or banks within a particular  
country or sector.

(a)	Geographical	sectors	

The following table analyses the Group’s credit exposures, at their carrying amounts, by geographical region as at the 
balance sheet date. In this analysis, exposures are categorised based on the country of domicile of the counterparty.

At 31 December 2011

Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers:
– overdrafts
– investment management loan book
– trust and pension debtors
– other debtors
Debt securities:
– unlisted debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

At 31 December 2010

Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers:
– overdrafts
– investment management loan book
– trust and pension debtors
– other debtors
Debt securities:
– unlisted debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

United 
Kingdom 
£’000

12,479
53,116

4,310
34,758
742
2,050

370,093
27,847

Jersey 
£’000

–
–

122
263
–
3,268

Rest of 
the World 
£’000

964
11,892

455
1,413
–
406

Total 
£’000

13,443
65,008

4,887
36,434
742
5,724

– 539,500 909,593
31,155

3,267

41

505,395

3,694

557,897 1,066,986

United 
Kingdom 
£’000

16,953
25,562

2,775
30,462
930
–

305,000
27,706

Jersey 
£’000

Rest of 
the World 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
–

1,216
14,003

18,169
39,565

131
251
–
3,267

400
1,244
–
565

3,306
31,957
930
3,832

– 485,585 790,585
30,265

2,511

48

409,388

3,697 505,524 918,609

104	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

(b)	 Industry	sectors	

The Group’s credit exposures at the balance sheet date, analysed by the primary industry sectors in which our  
counterparties operate, were:

At 31 December 2011

Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers:
– overdrafts
– investment management loan book
– trust and pension debtors
– other debtors
Debt securities:
– unlisted debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

At 31 December 2010

Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers:
– overdrafts
– investment management loan book
– trust and pension debtors
– other debtors
Debt securities:
– unlisted debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

Public 
sector 
£’000

Financial 
institutions 
£’000

Private 
clients 
and other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
–

–
–
–
–

13,443
65,008

– 
–

13,443
65,008

–
–
–
–

4,887
36,434
742
5,724

4,887
36,434
742
5,724

86,983 822,610
5,580

–

– 909,593
31,155

25,575

86,983 906,641

73,362 1,066,986

Public 
sector 
£’000

Financial 
institutions 
£’000

Private 
clients 
and other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
–

–
–
–
–

18,169
39,565

–
–

18,169
39,565

–
–
–
–

3,306
31,957
930
3,832

3,306
31,957
930
3,832

– 790,585
6,764
–

– 790,585
30,265

23,501

– 855,083

63,526 918,609

(ii)	

Liquidity	risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with financial liabilities that 
are settled by delivering cash or another financial asset.

The primary objective of the Group’s treasury policy is to manage short to medium term liquidity requirements and Rathbone 
Investment Management (‘the Bank’) performs an annual assessment of liquidity adequacy in accordance with the requirements 
outlined in BIPRU 12 (our ‘Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment’). The Bank faces two principal risks, namely that 
a significant proportion of client funds are withdrawn over a short period of time (retail funding risk) and the risk that 
marketable assets may not be capable of being realised in the time and at the value required (marketable assets risk).

Retail funding risks are managed by daily cash mismatch analyses using expected cash and asset maturity profiles and regular 
forecasting work. This is supported by stress tests which cover firm-specific idiosyncratic scenarios and/or the effects of  
unforeseen market wide stresses. Strict tolerance and early warning criteria are also set to control any liquidity mismatches. 
Marketable assets risk is primarily managed by holding cash and marketable instruments that are realisable at short notice.  
The Group operates strict criteria to ensure that investments are liquid and placed with high-quality counterparties.  
A minimum liquid assets buffer (to be held in eligible liquid assets) is set by the Board at least annually.

The Group does not rely on external funding for its activities.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

105

	
 
	
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(ii)  Liquidity risk	continued

Non-derivative cash flows 
The table below presents the undiscounted cash flows receivable and payable by the Group under non-derivative financial  
assets and liabilities analysed by the remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date.

At 31 December 2011

Cash flows arising from financial assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

On 
demand 
£’000

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

No fixed 
maturity 
date 
£’000

Total 
£’000

4
–
33,254
4,944

–
–
–
13,443
771
31,078
27,865
12,244
65,653 484,863 355,457
9
26,056

825

–
–
–
–
10,602
50

–
–
–
5,203

4
13,443
65,103
50,256
– 916,575
26,940
–

Cash flows arising from financial assets

104,680

567,684 384,102

10,652

5,203 1,072,321

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

513
–
866,431
969

–
22,196
41,897
27,109

–
–
351
94

–
–
–
10,119

513
–
–
22,196
– 908,679
38,291
–

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities

867,913

91,202

445

10,119

– 969,679

Net liquidity gap

(763,233) 476,482 383,657

533

5,203 102,642

At 31 December 2010

Cash flows arising from financial assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

On 
demand 
£’000

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
 5 years 
£’000

4
–
31,306
3,393

–
–
–
18,169
–
8,264
22,793
11,159
39,522 371,307 366,369
10
25,369

1,483

–
–
–
–
20,454
94

No fixed 
maturity 
date 
£’000

–
–
–
5,229
–
–

Total 
£’000

4
18,169
39,570
42,574
797,652
26,956

Cash flows arising from financial assets

75,708 434,268 389,172

20,548

5,229 924,925

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

215
–
718,171
131

1,545
23,712
43,353
23,639

1,562
–
525
1,888

–
–
–
13,488

3,322
–
–
23,712
– 762,049
39,146
–

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities

718,517

92,249

3,975

13,488

– 828,229

Net liquidity gap

(642,809) 342,019 385,197

7,060

5,229

96,696

Included within the amounts due to customers on demand disclosed above are balances that are repayable on demand or  
that do not have a contractual maturity date, which historical experience shows are unlikely to be called in the short term.  
A prudent level of highly liquid assets is retained to cover reasonably foreseeable short term changes in client deposits.  
All debt securities are readily marketable and can be realised through disposals.

106	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(ii)  Liquidity risk	continued

Off-balance sheet items 
Cash flows arising from the Group’s off-balance sheet financial liabilities (note 30) are summarised in the table below.

The contractual value of the Group’s commitments to extend credit to clients and maximum potential value of financial 
guarantees are analysed by the duration of the commitment. Future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating 
leases are reported by their contractual payment dates. Capital commitments are summarised by the earliest expected date  
of payment.

At 31 December 2011

Loan commitments
Financial guarantees
Operating lease commitments
Capital commitments

Total off-balance sheet items

At 31 December 2010

Loan commitments
Financial guarantees
Operating lease commitments
Capital commitments

Total off-balance sheet items

Total liquidity requirement

At 31 December 2011

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Total off-balance sheet items

At 31 December 2010

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Total off-balance sheet items

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

6,925
–
1,171
2,223

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

–
–
1,855
–

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

–
578
20,981
–

After 
5 years 
£’000

–
–
34,448
–

Total 
£’000

6,925
578
58,455
2,223

10,319

1,855

21,559

34,448

68,181

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

7,724
5
1,305
594

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

–
–
3,910
–

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

–
578
11,206
–

After 
5 years 
£’000

–
–
7,749
–

Total 
£’000

7,724
583
24,170
594

9,628

3,910

11,784

7,749

33,071

On 
demand 
£’000

867,913
–

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

91,202
10,319

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

445
1,855

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

10,119
21,559

After 
5 years 
£’000

Total 
£’000

– 969,679
68,181

34,448

867,913 101,521

2,300

31,678

34,448 1,037,860

On 
demand 
£’000

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

718,517
–

92,249
9,628

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

3,975
3,910

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

13,488
11,784

After 
5 years 
£’000

Total 
£’000

– 828,229
33,071

7,749

718,517 101,877

7,885

25,272

7,749 861,300

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

107

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(iii)	 Market	risk

Interest rate risk 
Cash flow interest rate risk is the risk that the future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes 
in market interest rates. Fair value interest rate risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument will fluctuate because 
of changes in market interest rates.

The Group’s principal exposure to cash flow interest rate risk arises from the mismatch between the repricing of its financial 
assets and liabilities. In particular, customer accounts and loan balances are repriced very shortly after changes in base 
rates, whereas the yield on the Group’s interest-bearing assets is correlated to the future expectation of base rates and varies 
depending on the maturity profile of the Group’s treasury portfolio. The average maturity mismatch is controlled by the 
banking committee, which generally lengthens the mismatch when the yield curve is expected to rise and shortens it when 
the yield curve is expected to fall.

The table below shows the consolidated repricing profile of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, stated at their carrying 
amounts, categorised by the earlier of contractual repricing or maturity dates.

At 31 December 2011

Assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Investment securities:
– equity securities
– debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

–
–
64,091
46,586

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than  
6 months 
£’000

After  
6 months 
but not 
more than  
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than  
5 years 
£’000

After 
5 years 
£’000 

Non- 
interest 
bearing 
£’000

–
–
750
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
4
– 13,443
167
–
1,201
–

Total 
£’000

4
13,443
65,008
47,787

–

–
551,750 289,843
–

–

–
58,000
–

–
10,000
–

2,953
–
–
–
– 31,155

2,953
909,593
31,155

662,427 290,593

58,000

10,000

– 48,923 1,069,943

513
–
902,372
134

903,019

–
–
350
–

350

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
– 22,196
–
5,934
– 31,580

513
22,196
908,656
31,714

–

59,710

963,079

Interest rate repricing gap

(240,592) 290,243

58,000

10,000

– (10,787) 106,864

108	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(iii)  Market risk continued

At 31 December 2010

Assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Investment securities:
– equity securities
– debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than  
6 months 
£’000

After  
6 months 
but not 
more than  
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than  
5 years 
£’000

After 
5 years 
£’000 

Non- 
interest 
bearing 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

–
–
39,536
35,190

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
3,267

–
–
–
–

–
20,000
–

–

–

–
408,585 217,000 145,000
–

–

–

483,311 217,000 148,267

20,000

3,304
–
756,025
125

759,454

–
–
150
–

150

–
–
373
–

373

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

4
18,169
29
1,568

4
18,169
39,565
40,025

3,087

3,087
– 790,585
30,265

30,265

53,122 921,700

–
23,712

3,304
23,712
5,478 762,026
32,255

32,130

61,320 821,297

(8,198) 100,403

Interest rate repricing gap

(276,143) 216,850 147,894

20,000

The banking committee has set an overall pre-tax interest rate exposure limit of £5,000,000 (2010: £5,000,000) for the total 
potential profit or loss resulting from an unexpected immediate and sustained 2% movement in Sterling interest rates for the 
Bank, the principal operating subsidiary. The potential total profit or loss is calculated on the basis of the average number 
of days to repricing of the interest-bearing liabilities compared with the period to repricing on a corresponding amount of 
interest-bearing assets.

At 31 December 2011, the Bank had £876.2 million (2010: £734.2 million) of Sterling interest-bearing liabilities averaging 
two days (2010: two days) to repricing, which were matched by Sterling assets averaging 65 days (2010: 89 days) to repricing, 
creating an exposure of 63 days (2010: 87 days). The total potential impact on profit after tax and equity was £2,211,000 
(2010: £2,542,000) at the balance sheet date for a 2% decrease or increase in interest rates. The Group held no forward rate 
agreements at 31 December 2011 (2010: none).

Foreign exchange risk 
The Group is exposed to translational foreign exchange risk as it undertakes transactions in foreign currencies and 
is therefore exposed to changes in foreign exchange rate fluctuations. The Group monitors its currency exposures 
that arise in the ordinary course of business on a daily basis and significant exposures are managed through the use of spot 
contracts, from time to time, so as to reduce any currency exposure to a minimal amount. The Group’s structural currency 
exposure was eliminated on the disposal of its Switzerland, Singapore, British Virgin Islands and Dutch operations during 
2009 and 2010.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

109

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(iii)  Market risk continued

The Group does not have any material exposure to transactional foreign exchange risk. The table below summarises the 
Group’s exposure to foreign currency translation risk at 31 December 2011. Included in the table are the Group’s financial 
assets and liabilities, at carrying amounts, categorised by currency.

At 31 December 2011

Assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Investment securities:
– equity securities
– debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Net on-balance sheet position

Loan commitments

At 31 December 2010

Assets
Cash
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Investment securities:
– equity securities
– debt securities and money market funds
Other financial assets

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Deposits by banks
Settlement balances
Due to customers
Other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Net on-balance sheet position

Loan commitments

Sterling 
£’000

US Dollar 
£’000

Euro 
£’000

Other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

4
12,070
44,225
45,543

–
331
12,967
901

2,389
909,593
31,089

–
–
66

–
879
3,805
928

564
–
–

–
163
4,011
415

4
13,443
65,008
47,787

–
2,953
– 909,593
31,155
–

1,044,913

14,265

6,176

4,589 1,069,943

285
21,103
883,631
31,688

–
807
15,266
26

–
–
5,494
–

228
286

513
22,196
4,265 908,656
31,714

–

936,707

16,099

5,494

4,779 963,079

108,206

(1,834)

6,925

Sterling 
£’000

–

US Dollar 
£’000

4
14,662
16,758
38,421

–
1,252
16,450
288

2,518
790,585
28,606

–
–
13

682

–

Euro 
£’000

–
1,831
3,633
747

569
–
115

(190) 106,864

–

6,925

Other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
424
2,724
569

4
18,169
39,565
40,025

–
3,087
– 790,585
30,265

1,531

891,554

18,003

6,895

5,248 921,700

3,089
22,582
738,751
28,941

–
789
16,439
193

–
146
4,224
1,348

215
195

3,304
23,712
2,612 762,026
32,255
1,773

793,363

17,421

5,718

4,795 821,297

98,191

582

1,177

453 100,403

7,724

–

–

–

7,724

A 10% weakening of the US Dollar against Sterling, occurring on 31 December 2011, would have increased equity and 
profit after tax by £135,000 (2010: reduced by £42,000). A 10% weakening of the Euro against Sterling, occurring on 
31 December 2011, would have reduced equity and profit after tax by £50,000 (2010: £85,000). A 10% strengthening 
of the US Dollar or Euro would have had an equal and opposite effect. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in 
particular other exchange rates, remain constant.

110	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

28	 Financial	risk	management	continued

(iii)  Market risk continued

Price risk 
Price risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in 
market prices (other than those arising from interest rate risk or foreign exchange risk). The Group is exposed to price risk 
through its holdings of equity investment securities, which are reported at their fair value (note 15).

At 31 December 2011, the fair value of equity securities recognised on the balance sheet was £2,953,000 (2010: £3,087,000). 
A 10% fall in global equity markets would, in isolation, result in a pre-tax impact on net assets of £295,000 
(2010: £309,000); there would be no impact on profit after tax. A 10% rise in global markets would have had an equal  
and opposite effect.

Fair values 
The fair values of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities are not materially different from their carrying values, with the 
exception of held to maturity investment securities (note 15).

The table below analyses financial instruments measured at fair value into a fair value hierarchy based on the valuation 
technique used to determine the fair value.

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either 

directly or indirectly.

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

At 31 December 2011

Assets
Available for sale securities:
– equity securities
– money market funds

Total financial assets

At 31 December 2010

Assets
Available for sale securities:
– equity securities
– money market funds

Total financial assets

Level 1 
£’000

2,384
–

2,384

Level 1 
£’000

2,513
–

2,513

Level 2 
£’000

569
65,610

66,179

Level 2 
£’000

574
39,500

40,074

Level 3 
£’000

–
–

–

Level 3 
£’000

–
–

–

Total 
£’000

2,953
65,610

68,563

Total 
£’000

3,087
39,500

42,587

The fair value of unlisted equity securities is calculated by reference to net asset values with a liquidity discount applied. 
The fair value of money market funds is their daily redemption value.

There have been no transfers between levels during the year. Money market funds are demand securities and changes to 
estimates of interest rates will not affect their fair value.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

111

	
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

29 

Capital management

Rathbone Brothers Plc’s capital is defined for accounting purposes as total equity. As at 31 December 2011 this totalled 
£190,653,000 (2010: £185,374,000). The Company has no external borrowings at 31 December 2011 (2010: £3,089,000) (note 20).

The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to:

• 

safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can continue to provide returns for shareholders and benefits 
for other stakeholders;

•  maintain a strong capital base to be able to support the development of the business when required;

•  optimise the distribution of capital across Group companies reflecting the requirements of each business;

• 

strive to make capital freely transferable across the Group where possible; and

•  comply with regulatory requirements at all times.

Rathbones is classified under the Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) as a banking group and performs an Internal Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), which is presented to the FSA on an annual basis. Regulatory capital resources for 
ICAAP purposes are calculated in accordance with CRD rules. These require certain adjustments to and certain deductions 
from accounting capital, the latter largely in respect of intangible assets. The ICAAP compares regulatory capital resources 
against regulatory capital requirements derived using the CRD’s Pillar I and Pillar II methodology. The Group has adopted 
the standardised approach to calculating its Pillar I credit risk component and the basic indicator approach to calculating 
its operational risk component. Capital management policy and practices are applied at both Group and entity level.

At 31 December 2011 the Group’s regulatory capital resources, including retained earnings for 2011, were £89,770,000 
(2010: £85,250,000). The increase in reserves during 2011 was partially offset by an increase in intangible assets.

In addition to a variety of stress tests performed as part of the ICAAP process, and daily reporting in respect of treasury 
activity, capital levels are monitored and forecasted on a monthly basis to ensure that dividends and investment requirements 
are appropriately managed and appropriate buffers are kept against adverse business conditions. Regular exercises are also 
run to ensure that the Group’s structures remain optimal.

Regulatory capital requirements have been met throughout the financial years ended 31 December 2010 and 2011.

30 

Contingent liabilities and commitments

(a)  Indemnities are provided to a number of directors and employees who provide tax and trust advisory services in connection 

with them acting as directors on client structures in the normal course of business.

(b) Capital expenditure authorised and contracted for at 31 December 2011 but not provided in the financial statements 

amounted to £2,223,000 (2010: £594,000).

(c)  The contractual amounts of the Group’s commitments to extend credit to its clients are as follows:

Guarantees
Undrawn commitments to lend of 1 year or less

2011 
£’000

578
6,925

7,503

2010 
£’000

583
7,724

8,307

  The fair value of the guarantees is £nil (2010: £nil).

(d) The Group leases various offices and other assets under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. The leases have 
varying terms and renewal rights. During 2011 the Group committed to take on a 12 year lease at 1 Curzon Street, 
London and extended the lease on the Port of Liverpool Building. The Group’s agreement to lease space at 
1 Curzon Street, London provides for an upward only reset to market rents in 2018.

Payments under non-cancellable operating leases

No later than 1 year
Later than 1 year and no later than 5 years
Later than 5 years

2011 
£’000

3,026
20,981
34,448

58,455

2010 
£’000

5,215
11,206
7,749

24,170

112	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

30	 Contingent	liabilities	and	commitments	continued

(e)  In addition to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme levies accrued in the year further levy charges may be 
incurred in future years, although the ultimate cost remains uncertain. Further information is given in note 2.

31 

Related party transactions

The remuneration of the key management personnel of the Group, who are defined as the Company’s directors and other 
members of senior management who are responsible for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group, is set 
out below. Historically, the key management personnel of the Group were considered to be limited to the Company’s directors. 
The comparative balances in this note have been restated to reflect the revised presentation. Further information about the 
remuneration of individual directors is provided in the audited part of the directors’ remuneration report on pages 50 to 57.

Short term employee benefits
Post employment benefits
Other long term benefits
Share-based payments

2011 
£’000

6,029
321
964
1,828

9,142

2010 
£’000

5,990
320
1,333
1,876

9,519

Dividends totalling £399,000 were paid in the year (2010: £432,000) in respect of ordinary shares held by key 
management personnel.

At 31 December 2011, the Group had provided interest-free season ticket loans of £8,000 (2010: £7,000) to key 
management personnel.

At 31 December 2011, key management personnel and their close family members had gross outstanding deposits of 
£1,040,000 (2010: £1,395,000) and gross outstanding banking loans of £1,685,000 (2010: £1,299,000), of which  
£1,685,000 (2010: £1,299,000) were made on normal business terms. A number of the Company’s directors and their  
close family members make use of the services provided by companies within the Group. Charges for such services are made  
at various staff rates.

The Group’s transactions with the pension funds are described in note 24. At 31 December 2011, £10,000 was due from 
the pension schemes (2010: £4,000).

The Group managed 18 unit trusts and OEICs during 2011 (2010: 16 unit trusts and OEICs). Total annual management 
charges of £14,451,000 (2010: £12,823,000) were earned, calculated on the bases published in the individual fund 
prospectuses, which also state the terms and conditions of the management contract with the Group. Annual management  
fees owed to the Group as at 31 December 2011 totalled £1,208,000 (2010: £1,078,000).

All amounts outstanding with related parties are unsecured and will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or 
received. No provisions have been made for doubtful debts in respect of the amounts owed by related parties.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

113

	
 
Notes	to	the	consolidated	financial	statements	continued

32 

Consolidated statement of cash flows

For the purposes of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise the following balances with 
less than three months until maturity from the date of acquisition:

Cash
Loans and advances to banks (note 13)
Available for sale investment securities (note 15)

2011 
£’000

4
64,258
65,610

129,872

Available for sale investment securities are amounts invested in money market funds which are realisable on demand.

Cash flows arising from issue of ordinary shares comprise:

Share capital issued (note 25)
Share premium on shares issued (note 25)
Shares issued in relation to share-based schemes for which

no cash consideration was received

2011 
£’000

9
1,728

(696)

1,041

33 

Events after the balance sheet date

There have been no material events occurring between the balance sheet date and the date of signing this report.

2010 
£’000

4
39,565
39,500

79,069

2010 
£’000

4
732

(283)

453

114	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Company financial statements

116	 Company	statement	of	comprehensive	income	
116	 Company	statement	of	changes	in	equity
117	 Company	balance	sheet
118	 Company	statement	of	cash	flows
119	 Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements
134	
Five	year	record
135	 Corporate	information
136	 Our	offices

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report	and	accounts	2011		

115

	
Company statement of comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 December 2011

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income:
Net actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
Revaluation of available for sale investment securities:
– net (loss)/gain from changes in fair value
Deferred tax relating to components of other comprehensive income:
– revaluation of available for sale investment securities
– actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations

Other comprehensive income net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the year net of tax
attributable to equity holders of the Company

Note

45

15

2011 
£’000

15,027

(6,383)

(134)

94
1,477

(4,946)

2010 
£’000

39,192

(3,005)

155

(13)
782

(2,081)

10,081

37,111

  Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2011

Share
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
£’000

Note

Available 
for sale 
reserve 
£’000

Treasury 
shares 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
equity 
£’000

2,165

31,756

2,077

(4,032)

At 1 January 2010
Profit for the year

Net actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
Revaluation of available for sale investment securities
Deferred tax relating to components
of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive income net of tax
Dividends paid
Issue of share capital
Share-based payments:
– value of employee services
– cost of treasury shares acquired
– cost of treasury shares vesting
– tax on share-based payments

At 1 January 2011
Profit for the year

Net actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
Revaluation of available for sale investment securities
Deferred tax relating to components
of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive income net of tax
Dividends paid
Issue of share capital
Share-based payments:
– value of employee services
– cost of treasury shares acquired
– cost of treasury shares vesting
– tax on share-based payments

24

15

11

25

26

26

24

15

11

25

26

26

155

(13)

142

–

4

–

732

(569)
1,702

2,169

32,488

2,219

(2,899)

(134)

94

(40)

–

9

–

1,728

12,280
39,192

44,246
39,192

(3,005)

(3,005)
155

782

769

–

(2,223)
(18,167)

(2,081)
(18,167)
736

1,054

(1,702)
351

1,054
(569)
–
351

30,785
15,027

64,762
15,027

(6,383)

(6,383)
(134)

1,477

1,571

–

(4,906)
(19,491)

(4,946)
(19,491)
1,737

(2,955)
1,125

1,989

(1,125)
239

1,989
(2,955)
–
239

At 31 December 2011

2,178

34,216

2,179

(4,729)

22,518

56,362

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the Company financial statements.

116	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company balance sheet 
as at 31 December 2011

Non-current assets
Investment in subsidiaries
Other investments
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables
Provisions for liabilities and charges

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities
Employee benefits

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Available for sale reserve
Treasury shares
Retained earnings

Equity shareholders’ funds

Note

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

2009 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

38

39

40

41

40

42

43

44

45

46

46

26

37,975
2,953
3,268
2,488

46,684

44,240
991
1,158

46,389

93,073

–
(28,175)
(1,196)

(29,371)

17,018

(7,340)

(36,711)

56,362

2,178
34,216
2,179
(4,729)
22,518

56,362

37,975
3,087
3,538
2,405

47,005

44,924
469
410

45,803

92,808

(3,089)
(18,314)
–

(21,403)

24,400

(6,643)

(28,046)

64,762

2,169
32,488
2,219
(2,899)
30,785

64,762

22,999
2,932
4,098
2,925

32,954

44,812
323
185

45,320

78,274

(6,155)
(18,460)
–

(24,615)

20,705

(9,413)

(34,028)

44,246

2,165
31,756
2,077
(4,032)
12,280

44,246

The financial statements were approved by the Board of directors and authorised for issue on 20 February 2012 and were 
signed on its behalf by:

A D Pomfret  
Chief Executive  

R P Stockton 
Finance Director

Company registered number: 01000403

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the Company financial statements.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

117

	
 
Company statement of cash flows
for the year ended 31 December 2011

Note

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax
Investment revenues
Finance costs
Net charge for provisions
Defined benefit pension scheme charges
Share-based payment charges
Interest paid

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
– net decrease in trade debtors
– net decrease in prepayments, accrued income and other assets
– net increase/(decrease) in accruals, deferred income, 

provisions and other liabilities

Cash generated from operations
Defined benefit pension scheme contributions paid
Tax received

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Interest received
Intercompany dividends received
Other dividends received
Liquidation of subsidiary, net of cash transferred
Investment in subsidiaries

Net cash generated from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Purchase of shares for share-based payments
Issue of ordinary shares
Repayments of borrowings
Dividends paid

Net cash used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

44

24

9

24

38

38

32

42

11

14,430
(16,770)
10
1,196
1,484
2,604
(20)

2,934

158
799

9,253

13,144
(7,170)
1,802

7,776

672
16,000
98
–
–

16,770

(2,259)
1,041
(3,089)
(19,491)

(23,798)

748
410

1,158

39,877
(39,984)
67
–
1,510
1,729
(75)

3,124

266
162

(794)

2,758
(7,285)
809

(3,718)

114
39,781
90
274
(15,250)

25,009

(286)
453
(3,066)
(18,167)

(21,066)

225
185

410

The accompanying notes form an integral part of the Company financial statements.

118	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes to the Company financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 2011

34 

Significant accounting policies

Statement	of	compliance

The individual financial statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006 and have been 
prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), as adopted by the European Union.

On publishing the parent company financial statements here together with the Group financial statements, the Company  
is taking advantage of the exemption in Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income  
statement and related notes that form a part of these approved financial statements.

Changes	in	accounting	policies	and	disclosures

Intercompany balances, contingent liabilities and commitments 
The Company recharges the majority of the costs it incurs to its subsidiaries. Historically the resultant accruals, intercompany 
balances and off-balance sheet commitments have been shown net of these recharges. In these financial statements the 
presentation of these items has been amended to show the full legal obligation and the consequent recoverable amounts from 
subsidiaries. This has resulted in an increase in the amounts due from subsidiaries at 31 December 2010 of £15,420,000  
(2009: £16,346,000), an increase in prepayments at 31 December 2010 of £124,000 (2009: £720,000) and an increase in 
accruals at 31 December 2010 of £15,544,000 (2009: £17,066,000).

Developments	in	reporting	standards	and	interpretations

Developments in reporting standards and interpretations are the same as those set out in note 1 to the consolidated  
financial statements.

Principal	accounting	policies

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for the revaluation of certain financial 
instruments. The principal accounting policies adopted are as set out below:

Investments in subsidiaries 
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less, where appropriate, provision for impairment.

Management charges 
Intra-Group management charges arise in relation to staff costs and other administrative expenses that are initially borne  
by the Company and then recharged to other Group companies, when incurred.

Accounting policies in relation to impairment, interest income, dividend income, operating leases, borrowings, foreign  
currency, retirement benefit obligations, taxation, cash and cash equivalents and share-based payments are the same as the 
accounting policies set out in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.

35 

Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation and uncertainty

The critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation and uncertainty arise from the Company’s defined  
benefit pension schemes and loan notes issued by former subsidiaries. These are described in note 2 to the consolidated  
financial statements.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

119

	
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements continued

36 

Profit for the year

As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company has elected not to present its own income statement 
for the year. Rathbone Brothers Plc reported a profit after tax for the financial year ended 31 December 2011 of 
£15,027,000 (2010: £39,192,000).

Auditor’s remuneration for audit and other services to the Company are set out in note 7 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

The average number of employees during the year was as follows:

Investment Management:
– investment management services
– advisory services
Unit Trusts
Shared services

37   Dividends

2011

455
66
29
184

734

2010 
restated (note 1)

422
64
24
179

689

Details of the Company’s dividends paid and proposed for approval at the Annual General Meeting are set out in note 11 
to the consolidated financial statements.

38 

Investment in subsidiaries

At 1 January 2010
Additions
Disposals

At 1 January and 31 December 2011

Equities

Subordinated loans 
to Group undertakings 
£’000

250
15,000
–

15,250

Equities 
£’000

22,749
250
(274)

22,725

Total 
£’000

22,999
15,250
(274)

37,975

The Company completed the voluntary liquidation of its wholly owned subsidiaries Rathbone Trust Company B.V. on  
6 July 2010, Rathbone Bank (BVI) Limited (held indirectly) on 5 November 2010 and Rathbone Insurance Limited on  
30 December 2010. The Company applied for its wholly owned subsidiaries Rathbone Bros & Co (UK) Limited and  
Rathbones Limited to be struck off on 14 September 2010 and on 22 September 2010 respectively. This process was  
completed on 11 January 2011 for Rathbone Bros & Co (UK) Limited and on 18 January 2011 for Rathbones Limited.  
The disposal of these companies is included in the results for 2010.

A resolution was passed on 18 November 2011 to commence a members’ voluntary liquidation of Rathbone Neilson  
Cobbold Limited and Neilson Cobbold Holdings Plc. At the time of signing the financial statements, this process was  
still ongoing.

On 19 July 2010, the Company acquired 250,000 non-voting redeemable preference shares of £1 each (issued at par) in 
Harlequin Insurance PCC Limited Cell RAT36, which represents the entire share capital of that cell, for cash consideration. 
Harlequin Insurance PCC Limited Cell RAT36’s financial year end is 31 March.

120	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

38	

Investment	in	subsidiaries	continued

At 31 December 2011 the principal subsidiary undertakings were as follows:

Subsidiary undertaking

Rathbone Investment Management Limited

Rathbone Investment Management International Limited¹
Rathbone Trust Company Limited
Rathbone Unit Trust Management Limited¹
Rathbone Pension & Advisory Services Limited

1  Held by subsidiary undertaking

Country of incorporation

England & Wales

Jersey
England & Wales
England & Wales
England & Wales

Activity and operation

Investment management and
banking services
Investment management
Trust and tax services
Unit trust management
Pension advisory services

The Company owns, directly or indirectly, 100% of the ordinary share capital of all subsidiaries. A full list of the Company’s 
subsidiaries will be included in the Company’s annual return to Companies House.

Subordinated	loans	to	group	undertakings

The amounts subject to subordinated loan agreements are shown below:

Counterparty

Repayment date

Interest rate

Rathbone Investment

Management Limited
Rathbone Pension & Advisory

Services Limited

None

None

Bank of England base rate plus
2.50% to a maximum of 5%
Bank of England base rate plus
2.50% to a maximum of 5%

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000

15,000

15,000

250

250

15,250

15,250

The fair value of the subordinated loans is not materially different to their carrying amount.

The Group has not had any defaults of principal, interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated loans 
during the period.

39  Other investments

Available for sale securities

Equity securities – at fair value:
– listed
– unlisted

2011 
£’000

2,384
569

2,953

2010 
£’000

2,513
574

3,087

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

121

	
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

40 

Trade and other receivables

Loan notes
Prepayments and other receivables
Amounts owed by group undertakings

Current
Non-current

2011 
£’000

3,674
2,407
41,427

47,508

44,240
3,268

47,508

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

2009 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

3,832
603
44,027

48,462

44,924
3,538

48,462

4,098
1,406
43,406

48,910

44,812
4,098

48,910

Included within loan notes are vendor loan notes (‘Notes’) with a nominal value of £5,000,000 that were issued by the 
acquirer of the Group’s Jersey trust operations in 2008. The Notes are repayable on the occurrence of certain events,  
principally the refinancing of the operations disposed of.

The Notes bear no interest for three years from issue. From October 2011, interest is rolled-up into the loan at half the  
Bank of England base rate for the following two years. Thereafter, interest is rolled-up at the Bank of England base rate.  
The carrying value of the Notes has been discounted to £3,268,000 at 31 December 2011 (2010: £3,267,000; 2009: 
£3,267,000) and interest income is recognised over the expected life of the Notes under the effective interest rate method.

Included within loan notes is a Swiss Franc denominated loan to the acquirer of the Group’s Switzerland trust operations  
with a nominal value equivalent to £406,000 at 31 December 2011 (2010: £565,000; 2009: £831,000). The loan does  
not bear interest and the final instalment was received on 10 February 2012.

41  Deferred tax

Deferred income taxes are calculated on all temporary differences under the liability method using an effective tax rate  
of 25.0% (2010: 27.0%).

The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 January
Adjustments in respect of prior years:
– credited/(charged) to profit or loss
– directly to equity
Other movements in deferred tax:
– amounts charged to profit or loss
– actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations
– share-based payments
– fair value measurement of available for sale securities
Effect of change in corporation tax rate on deferred tax:
– charged to profit or loss
– charged to other comprehensive income
– charged directly to equity

2011 
£’000

2,405

13
(106)

(1,729)
1,691
377
35

(11)
(155)
(32)

2,488

2010 
£’000

2,925

(64)
56

(1,534)
841
313
(43)

(42)
(29)
(18)

2,405

122	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

41	 Deferred	tax	continued

Deferred tax assets

Share-based payments
Pensions

Deferred tax liabilities

Available for sale securities

The deferred tax charge in profit or loss comprises the following temporary differences:

Share-based payments
Pensions

2011 
£’000

1,142
2,072

3,214

2011 
£’000

726

2011 
£’000

16
1,711

1,727

2010 
£’000

919
2,306

3,225

2010 
£’000

820

2010 
£’000

(269)
1,909

1,640

Deferred income tax liabilities of £464,000 (2010: £448,000) have not been recognised in respect of unremitted earnings of 
certain subsidiaries as such amounts are not expected to be remitted to the UK. Unremitted earnings totalled £2,811,000 at  
31 December 2011 (2010: £2,492,000).

42  Borrowings

Included within deposits by banks is an unsecured term loan of £nil (2010: £3,089,000). The final instalment of this loan  
was paid in April 2011.

43  Trade and other payables

Accruals, deferred income and other creditors
Amounts owed to group undertakings
Other taxes and social security costs

2011 
£’000

25,611
58
2,506

28,175

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

2009 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

16,753
58
1,503

18,314

17,487
78
895

18,460

The fair value of trade and other payables is not materially different to their carrying amount.

All amounts owed to group undertakings are repayable on demand and are non-interest bearing.

44  Provisions for liabilities and charges

As at 1 January and 31 December 2010

Charged to profit or loss
Unused amount credited to profit or loss

Net charge to profit or loss

As at 31 December 2011

£’000

–

1,576
(380)

1,196

1,196

Provisions include £920,000 (2010: £nil) in relation to dilapidation costs and £276,000 (2010: £nil) of onerous lease costs 
arising from the relocation of the London head office premises from New Bond Street to 1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5FB 
(note 8).

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

123

	
 
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

45 

Employee benefits

Details of the defined benefit pension schemes operated by the Company are provided in note 24 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

46 

Share capital, treasury shares and share-based payments

Details of the share capital of the Company and treasury shares held by the Company together with changes thereto are 
provided in notes 25 and 26 to the consolidated financial statements. Details of options on the Company’s shares and  
share-based payments are set out in note 27 to the consolidated financial statements.

47 

Financial instruments

The Company’s risk management policies and procedures are integrated with the wider Rathbone Group’s risk management 
process. The Rathbone Group has identified the risks arising from all of its activities, including those of the Company, and has 
established policies and procedures to manage these items in accordance with its risk appetite. The Company categorises its 
financial risks into three areas:

(i)  credit risk;

(ii) liquidity risk; and

(iii)  market risk (which includes fair value interest rate risk, cash flow interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk and price risk).

The sections below outline the Group risk appetite, as applicable to the Company, and explain how the Company defines and 
manages each category of financial risk.

The Company’s risk management policies are designed to identify and analyse the risks that the Company faces, to set 
appropriate risk limits and controls and to monitor the risks and adherence to limits by means of reliable and up-to-date 
information systems. The Company regularly reviews its risk management policies and systems to reflect changes in the 
business and the wider industry.

The Company’s overall strategy and policies for monitoring and management of financial risk are set by the Board of directors 
(‘the Board’). The Board has embedded risk management within the business through the executive committee and senior 
management.

(i)	

Credit	risk

The Company takes on exposure to credit risk, which is the risk that a counterparty will be unable to pay amounts in full 
when due, through its trading activities. The principal sources of credit risk arise from depositing funds with banks and  
through providing long term and working capital financing for subsidiaries. The Company also took on credit exposure  
through the provision of loans as part of the disposal of its subsidiaries in Jersey and Switzerland in 2008 and 2009.

The Company places surplus funds with its banking subsidiary, which operates under the Group’s credit risk management 
policies. Group policy requires that funds are placed with a range of high-quality financial institutions. Investments are spread 
to avoid excessive exposure to any individual counterparty.

For the purposes of financial reporting the Company categorises its exposures based on the long term ratings awarded to 
counterparties by Fitch Ratings Ltd (‘Fitch’) or Moody’s Corporation (‘Moody’s’).

Cash equivalents (balances at banks) 
The Company has exposure to financial institutions through its bank deposits (reported within cash equivalents). These 
exposures principally arise from the placement of the Company’s own reserves.

Trade and other receivables 
Trade and other receivables relate to amounts placed with subsidiaries and loans provided to subsidiaries and former 
subsidiaries. The collection and ageing of trade and other receivables are reviewed on a periodic basis by management. 
Impairment provisions are made for any debts which are considered to be doubtful for collection.

124	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(i)  Credit risk	continued

Impairment and provisioning policies 
Impairment provisions are recognised for financial reporting purposes only for losses that have been incurred at the balance 
sheet date, based on objective evidence of impairment.

All credit exposures are reviewed individually, at least annually or more regularly when individual circumstances require. 
Impairment allowances on credit exposures are determined by an evaluation of the incurred loss at the balance sheet date on a 
case by case basis.

No impairment losses arose during the year (2010: none).

Maximum exposure to credit risk

Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

2011 
£’000

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

5,413
56,677
82
1,158

63,330

5,822
59,277
135
410

65,644

The above table represents the gross credit risk exposure of the Company at 31 December 2011 and 2010, without taking 
account of any collateral held or other credit enhancements attached.

All trade and other receivables are neither past due nor impaired. Loan notes are not subject to standard lending criteria. 
All other trade and other receivables are within normal terms and conditions of lending at the balance sheet date (2010: all 
within normal terms of trade).

The terms attached to loan notes are set out in note 40. Amounts owed to Group undertakings do not have specific repayment 
dates and are paid down periodically as trading requires.

Balances at banks 
All balances at banks were neither past due nor impaired. The credit quality of these balances is analysed below by reference 
to the long term credit rating awarded by Fitch, or equivalent rating by Moody’s as at the balance sheet date.

AA– to AA+
A to A+

2011 
£’000

–
1,158

1,158

2010 
£’000

410
–

410

Concentration of credit risk 
The Company has counterparty concentration risk within its balances at banks in that the principal exposure is to its banking 
subsidiary. The Board sets and monitors the Group policy for the management of Group funds, which include the placement 
of funds with a range of high-quality financial institutions.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

125

	
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(i)  Credit risk continued

(a)	 Geographical	sectors	

The following table analyses the Company’s credit exposures, at their carrying amounts, by geographical region as at the 
balance sheet date. In this analysis, exposures are categorised based on the country of domicile of the counterparty.

At 31 December 2011

Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

United 
Kingdom 
£’000

–
56,549
16
1,158

57,723

United 
Kingdom 
£’000

–
59,155
28
410

59,593

Jersey 
£’000

3,268
128
–
–

3,396

Jersey 
£’000

3,267
122
–
–

3,389

Rest of 
the World 
£’000 

406
–
66
–

472

Rest of 
the World 
£’000 

565
–
107
–

672

(b)	 Industry	sectors	

The Company’s credit exposures at the balance sheet date, analysed by the primary industry sectors in which our 
counterparties operate, were:

At 31 December 2011

Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Financial 
institutions 
£’000

–
41,690
–
1,158

42,848

Financial 
institutions 
£’000

–
54,585
–
410

54,995

Other 
companies 
£’000

3,674
14,987
82
–

18,743

Other 
companies 
£’000

3,832
4,692
135
–

8,659

Total 
£’000

3,674
56,677
82
1,158

61,591

Total 
£’000

3,832
59,277
135
410

63,654

Total 
£’000

3,674
56,677
82
1,158

61,591

Total 
£’000

3,832
59,277
135
410

63,654

126	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(ii)	

Liquidity	risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Company will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with financial liabilities 
that are settled by delivering cash or another financial asset. The Company places its funds in short term or demand facilities 
with financial institutions to ensure liquidity. The Company has no bank loans (2010: £3,089,000) and does not rely on 
external funding for its activities.

Non-derivative cash flows 
The table below presents the undiscounted cash flows receivable and payable by the Company on its financial assets and 
liabilities by remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date.

At 31 December 2011

Cash flows arising from financial assets
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Cash flows arising from financial assets

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities

On 
demand 
£’000

Not more  
than 
3 months 
£’000

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

No fixed 
maturity 
date 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
39,377
–
1,158

40,535

413
129
35
–

577

–
2,441
1
–

–
17,081
46
–

5,203
–
–
–

5,616
59,028
82
1,158

2,442

17,127

5,203

65,884

–

–

58
134

–
13,243

192

13,243

–

–
–

–

–

–
10,014

10,014

–

–
–

–

–

58
23,391

23,449

Net liquidity gap

40,343

(12,666)

2,442

7,113

5,203

42,435

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Cash flows arising from financial assets 
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Cash flows arising from financial assets

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

On 
demand 
£’000

Not more  
than 
3 months 
£’000

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
 5 years 
£’000

No fixed 
maturity 
date 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
44,027
11
410

44,448

355
113
38
–

506

360
345
4
–

–
17,081
82
–

5,229
–
–
–

5,944
61,566
135
410

709

17,163

5,229

68,055

–

1,545

1,562

–

58
125

–
9,760

–
–

–
11,745

–

–
–

–

3,107

58
21,630

24,795

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities

183

11,305

1,562

11,745

Net liquidity gap

44,265

(10,799)

(853)

5,418

5,229

43,260

Included within trade and other payables disclosed above are balances that are repayable on demand or that do not have a 
contractual maturity date, which historical experience shows are unlikely to be called in the short term.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

127

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued
(ii)  Liquidity risk continued

Off-balance sheet items 
Cash flows arising from the Company’s off-balance sheet financial liabilities arise solely from operating leases (note 49) 
and are summarised in the table below. Future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are reported 
by their contractual payment dates.

Operating lease commitments

At 31 December 2011
At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Total liquidity requirement

Total liquidity requirement

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Total off-balance sheet items

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Cash flows arising from financial liabilities
Total off-balance sheet items

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

1,140
1,275

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

1,772
3,825

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

20,871
10,955

After 
5 years 
£’000

Total 
£’000

34,448
7,308

58,231
23,363

On  
demand 
£’000

192
–

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

13,243
1,140

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

–
1,772

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

10,014
20,871

After 
5 years 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–
34,448

23,449
58,231

192

14,383

1,772

30,885

34,448

81,680

On  
demand 
£’000

183
–

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

11,305
1,275

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

1,562
3,825

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

11,745
10,955

After 
5 years 
£’000

–
7,308

Total 
£’000

24,795
23,363

183

12,580

5,387

22,700

7,308

48,158

128	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(iii)	 Market	risk

Interest rate risk 
Cash flow interest rate risk is the risk that the future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in 
market interest rates. Fair value interest rate risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of 
changes in market interest rates.

The Company’s principal exposure to cash flow interest rate risk arises from the mismatch between the repricing of its 
financial assets and liabilities. 

The table below shows the repricing profile of the Company’s financial assets and liabilities, stated at their carrying amounts, 
categorised by the earlier of contractual repricing or maturity dates.

At 31 December 2011

Assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Interest rate repricing gap

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Interest rate repricing gap

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

–

3,268
17,300
–
1,018

21,586

–

–
134

134

21,452

Not  
more than 
3 months 
£’000

–

–
15,250
–
279

15,529

3,089

–
125

3,214

12,315

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
6 months 
£’000

After  
6 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

After 
5 years 
£’000

Non- 
interest 
bearing 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

2,953

2,953

406
39,377
82
140

3,674
56,677
82
1,158

42,958

64,544

–

–

58
18,441

58
18,575

18,499

18,633

24,459

45,911

After  
3 months 
but not 
more than 
6 months 
£’000

After  
6 months 
but not 
more than 
1 year 
£’000

After  
1 year 
but not 
more than 
5 years 
£’000

After 
5 years 
£’000

Non- 
interest 
bearing 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

3,267
–
–
–

3,267

–

–
–

–

3,267

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

3,087

3,087

565
44,027
135
131

3,832
59,277
135
410

47,945

66,741

–

3,089

58
15,544

58
15,669

15,602

18,816

32,343

47,925

A 1% parallel increase/decrease in the Sterling yield curve would result in an increase/decrease in profit after tax and equity 
of £73,000 (2010: £70,000).

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

129

	
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(iii)  Market risk continued

Foreign exchange risk 
The Company does not have any material exposure to transactional foreign exchange risk. The table below summarises the 
Company’s exposure to foreign currency translation risk at 31 December 2011. Included in the table are the Company’s 
financial assets and liabilities, at carrying amounts, categorised by currency.

At 31 December 2011

Assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Net on-balance sheet position

At 31 December 2010 (restated – note 34)

Assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables:
– loan notes
– amounts owed by Group undertakings
– other financial assets
Balances at banks

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Borrowings
Trade and other payables:
– amounts owed to Group undertakings
– other financial liabilities

Total financial liabilities

Net on-balance sheet position

Sterling 
£’000

US Dollar 
£’000

Euro 
£’000

Other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

2,389

3,268
56,677
16
1,158

63,508

–

58
18,575

18,633

44,875

–

–
–
66
–

66

–

–
–

–

66

Sterling 
£’000

US Dollar 
£’000

2,518

3,267
59,277
28
410

65,500

3,089

58
15,669

18,816

46,684

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

564

–

2,953

–
–
–
–

406
–
–
–

3,674
56,677
82
1,158

564

406

64,544

–

–
–

–

564

Euro 
£’000

569

–
–
107
–

676

–

–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

58
18,575

18,633

406

45,911

Other 
£’000

Total 
£’000

–

3,087

565
–
–
–

3,832
59,277
135
410

565

66,741

–

–
–

–

3,089

58
15,669

18,816

676

565

47,925

A 10% weakening of the US Dollar or Euro against Sterling, occurring on 31 December 2011, would have reduced equity 
and profit after tax by £5,000 or £41,000 respectively (2010: £nil or £49,000 respectively). A 10% strengthening of the  
US Dollar or Euro would have had an equal and opposite effect. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular 
other exchange rates, remain constant.

130	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

47	 Financial	instruments	continued

(iii)  Market risk continued

Price risk 
Price risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in 
market prices (other than those arising from interest rate risk or foreign exchange risk). The Company is exposed to price risk 
through its holdings of equity investment securities, which are reported at their fair value (note 39).

At 31 December 2011, the fair value of equity securities recognised on the balance sheet was £2,953,000 (2010: £3,087,000). 
A 10% fall in global equity markets would, in isolation, result in a pre-tax impact on net assets of £295,000 
(2010: £309,000); there would be no impact on profit after tax. A 10% rise in global markets would have had an equal and 
opposite effect.

Fair values 
The fair values of the Company’s financial assets and liabilities are not materially different from their carrying values,  
with the exception of equity investments in subsidiaries which are carried at historical cost (note 38).

The table below analyses financial instruments measured at fair value into a fair value hierarchy based on the valuation 
technique used to determine the fair value.

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly 

or indirectly.

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

At 31 December 2011

Available for sale equity securities

Total financial assets

At 31 December 2010

Available for sale equity securities

Total financial assets

Level 1 
£’000

2,384

2,384

Level 1 
£’000

2,513

2,513

Level 2 
£’000

569

569

Level 2 
£’000

574

574

Level 3 
£’000

–

–

Level 3 
£’000

–

–

Total 
£’000

2,953

2,953

Total 
£’000

3,087

3,087

There have been no transfers between levels during the year (2010: none).

48 

Capital management

The Company’s objectives when managing capital are to:

• 

safeguard the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can continue to provide returns for shareholders 
and benefits for other stakeholders; and

•  maintain a strong capital base to support the development of its business.

For monitoring purposes, the Company defines capital as equity shareholders’ funds. Management monitor the level of 
distributable reserves on a monthly basis and compare this to forecast dividends. Capital is distributed to the Company from 
operating subsidiaries on a timely basis to ensure sufficient capital is maintained. The Board of directors considers the level  
of capital held in relation to forecast performance, dividend payments and wider plans for the business, although formal 
quantitative targets are not set. The Company’s total capital at 31 December 2011, together with movements during the year 
then ended, is set out in the Company statement of changes in equity.

There were no changes in the Company’s approach to capital management during the year.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

131

	
 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

49 

Contingent liabilities and commitments

Indemnities are provided to a number of directors and employees who provide tax and trust advisory services in connection 
with them acting as directors on client structures in the normal course of business.

The Company leases various offices and other assets under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. The leases have 
varying terms and renewal rights. During 2011 the Company committed to take on a 12 year lease at 1 Curzon Street, 
London and extended the lease on the Port of Liverpool Building. The Company’s agreement to lease space at 
1 Curzon Street, London provides for an upward only reset to market rents in 2018.

Payments under non-cancellable operating leases

No later than 1 year
Later than 1 year and no later than 5 years
Later than 5 years

2011 
£’000

2,912
20,871
34,448

58,231

2010 
£’000 
restated (note 34)

5,100
10,955
7,308

23,363

50 

Related party transactions

(i)	

Transactions	with	key	management	personnel

The remuneration of the key management personnel of the Company, who are defined as the Company’s directors and other 
members of senior management who are responsible for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Company, 
is set out below. Historically, the key management personnel of the Company were considered to be limited to the Company’s 
directors. The comparative balances in this note have been restated to reflect the revised presentation.

Key management personnel compensation

Short term employee benefits
Post employment benefits
Other long term benefits
Share-based payments

2011 
£’000

1,566
85
22
730

2,403

2010 
£’000

1,449
81
74
732

2,336

Dividends totalling £399,000 were paid in the year (2010: £432,000) in respect of ordinary shares held by key  
management personnel.

All amounts outstanding with related parties are unsecured and will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or 
received. No provisions have been made for doubtful debts in respect of the amounts owed by related parties.

132	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Notes	to	the	Company	financial	statements	continued

50	 Related	party	transactions continued

(ii)	

Other	related	party	transactions

During the year, the Company entered into the following transactions with fellow subsidiaries:

Interest
Charges for management services

2011 
Receivable 
£’000

2011 
Payable 
£’000

527
73,826

74,353

–
–

–

2010 
Receivable 
£’000

113
61,422

61,535

2010 
Payable 
£’000

–
–

–

The Company’s balances with fellow Group companies at 31 December 2011 are set out in notes 38, 40 and 43.

The Company’s transactions with the pension funds are described in note 45. At 31 December 2011 £10,000 was due from 
the pension schemes (2010: £4,000).

All transactions and outstanding balances with fellow Group companies are priced on an arm’s length basis and are to be 
settled in cash. None of the balances are secured and no provisions have been made for doubtful debts for any amounts due 
from fellow Group companies.

51 

Events after the balance sheet date

There have been no material events occurring between the balance sheet date and the date of signing this report.

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

133

	
Five year record

Operating income
Underlying profit before tax
Exceptional items
Profit before tax
Tax
Profit after tax
Equity dividends paid and proposed

Continuing basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Dividends per ordinary share

2011 
£’000

144,452
46,219
(7,067)
39,152
(10,446)
28,706
20,001

66.72p

65.90p

46.0p

2010
£’000

127,184
38,503
(8,420)
30,083
(8,531)
21,552
19,067

49.76p

49.35p

44.0p

2009
£’000

116,757
32,446
(2,978)
29,468
(9,271)
20,197
18,159

46.87p

46.85p

42.0p

2008
£’000

131,166
45,020
(2,714)
42,306
(13,421)
28,885
17,984

67.57p

67.02p

42.0p

2007  
£’000

134,480
47,302
–
47,302
(14,212)
33,090
17,479

77.79p

76.54p

41.0p

Equity shareholders’ funds

190,653

185,374

182,489

184,631

184,750

Total funds under management

£15.85bn

£15.63bn

£13.10bn

£10.46bn

£13.12bn

The amounts disclosed for 2007 include the results of operations that were discontinued in 2009.

134	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

 
Corporate information

Company Secretary and registered office

Registrars and transfer office

R E Loader FCA 
1 Curzon Street 
London 
W1J 5FB

Company No. 01000403 
www.rathbones.com 
richard.loader@rathbones.com

Equiniti 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

www.equiniti.com

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc	Report and accounts 2011 	

135

	
15 Esplanade 
St Helier 
Jersey 
JE1 2RB 
Channel Islands 
Tel +44 (0)1534 740 500

The Stables 
Levens Hall 
Kendal 
Cumbria 
LA8 0PB 
Tel +44 (0)1539 561 457

Port of Liverpool Building 
Pier Head 
Liverpool 
L3 1NW 
Tel +44 (0)151 236 6666

Fiennes House 
32 Southgate Street 
Winchester 
Hampshire 
SO23 9EH 
Tel +44 (0)1962 857 000

Unit Trusts office

1 Curzon Street 
London 
W1J 5FB 
Tel +44 (0)20 7399 0000

Our offices

Head office

1 Curzon Street 
London 
W1J 5FB 
Tel +44 (0)20 7399 0000

Investment Management offices

1 Curzon Street 
London 
W1J 5FB 
Tel +44 (0)20 7399 0000

1 Albert Street 
Aberdeen 
AB25 1XX 
Tel +44 (0)1224 218 180

Temple Point 
1 Temple Row 
Birmingham 
B2 5LG 
Tel +44 (0)121 233 2626

10 Queen Square 
Bristol 
BS1 4NT 
Tel +44 (0)117 929 1919

North Wing, City House 
126 – 130 Hills Road 
Cambridge 
CB2 1RE 
Tel +44 (0)1223 229 229

1 Northgate 
Chichester 
West Sussex 
PO19 1AT 
Tel +44 (0)1243 775 373

28 St Andrew Square 
Edinburgh 
EH2 1AF 
Tel +44 (0)131 550 1350

The Senate 
Southernhay Gardens 
Exeter 
EX1 1UG 
Tel +44 (0)1392 201 000

136	

Rathbone	Brothers	Plc Report and accounts 2011

It	is	important	to	us	that	all	materials	used	in	the	production	of	this	document	
are	environmentally	sustainable.	The	paper	is	FSC	certified	and	contains	50%	
recycled	fibre	and	50%	virgin	fibre	from	sustainable	sources.	Once	you	have	
finished	with	this	report	please	recycle	it.

Designed	and	produced	by	Linnett	Webb	Jenkins.

Rathbone Brothers Plc
1 Curzon Street 
London W1J 5FB

Tel +44 (0)20 7399 0000 
Fax +44 (0)20 7399 0011

www.rathbones.com